JP6687863B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko game machine.

  Generally, the pachinko gaming machine acquires a random number value for lottery when a game ball enters the starting opening, and temporarily stores it as an operation holding ball up to a predetermined upper limit number. One such operation-holding ball is sequentially exhausted every time a predetermined starting condition is satisfied, and whether or not a big hit is hit is determined. When the result of the winning / judgment is a big hit, the symbols consisting of a plurality of columns are variably displayed, and then the symbols are stopped and displayed in a predetermined winning mode, and the large winning opening which is normally closed is set to the open state. A special game (big hit game) is established.

  In this type of pachinko gaming machine, there are various types of probability variation game states in which the winning probability of the above win / loss determination is increased, and time saving game states in which the efficiency of symbol fluctuation for suggesting or informing the result of the above win / loss determination is increased. It is known that the game state is provided and the remaining number of symbol variations until the game state is finished is notified (for example, refer to Patent Document 1).

JP, 2003-210759, A

  Since many pachinko game machines that employ such a configuration already exist as conventional models, further improvement in the excitement of the game is required to achieve differentiation from the conventional models.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a pachinko gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the game.

  In order to achieve such an object, the pachinko game machine according to the present invention has a game board in which a game area is formed, and a first start opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area and into which a game ball can enter. , A second starting opening provided at a position different from the first starting opening in the game area and allowing a game ball to enter, and a decision of whether or not to win the game ball when the game ball enters the first starting opening First win / fail judgment means, second win / fail judgment means for executing win / no judgment upon entry of a game ball into the second starting opening, and result of win / no judgment by the first win / fail judgment means or the second When the result of the hit determination by the hit determination means is a big hit, the special game execution means for executing the special game advantageous to the player, and the first symbol showing the result of the hit determination by the first hit determination means are displayed in a variable manner and With the first symbol display device that is stopped and displayed, A second symbol display device in which the second symbol indicating the result of the determination of the winning / absence determination by the second winning / improper determination means is displayed in a variable and stopped manner, and a first symbol in the first symbol display device is displayed in a variable manner and stopped in a first manner The symbol display control means, the second symbol display control means for variably displaying and stopping the second symbol in the second symbol display device, and the result of the hit / no hit judgment by the first hit / miss judgment means or the second hit / miss judgment means. An effect display device that displays an effect that suggests the result of the hit determination and an effect determination unit that determines the effect content to be displayed on the effect display device are provided, and the normal game state and the normal game state are provided as a plurality of types of game states. At least having an advantageous game state having a higher degree of advantage than the state, and when the game state is the advantageous game state, counting from immediately after the advantageous game state is set, The game state can be set from the advantageous game state to the normal game state when the total number of the variable display times of the one symbol and the second symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit number, and the game state is the advantageous game state. In some cases, information about the remaining number of the advantageous game state can be notified over a plurality of variable displays, and when the game state is the advantageous game state, the remaining number reaches a predetermined number smaller than the upper limit number. Until, it is configured not to notify the information regarding the remaining number of times, has at least a first effect mode as an effect mode in a normal game state, has at least a second effect mode as an effect mode in an advantageous game state, The first upper limit number is set as the upper limit number of times to stay in the first effect mode, and the second upper limit number is set as the upper limit number of times to stay in the second effect mode. Is set, and when staying in the first effect mode, as the variable display number until reaching the first upper limit number, only the variable display number of the first symbol performed in the first effect mode is targeted. When staying in the second effect mode, the total number of variable display times of the first symbol and the second symbol performed during the second effect mode is set as the variable display number until the second upper limit number is reached. It is characterized by being targeted.

  According to the pachinko machine according to the present invention, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of the present embodiment. It is a rear view of the pachinko game machine. It is a control block diagram of the pachinko game machine. It is a functional block diagram of the main control board and the effect control board of the pachinko game machine. It is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol win / loss lottery table. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the big hit non-lottery process in the hit determination of the special symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol jackpot symbol table, (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. It is a transition diagram of a game state and an effect mode. It is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 1. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 2. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 3. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 4. It is a schematic diagram which shows the fluctuation pattern table 5. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a normal symbol win / loss table, (B) is a schematic diagram showing a normal symbol variation pattern table, (C) is a schematic diagram showing a normal electric auditors opening pattern table. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the simultaneous variation process of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is a schematic diagram for explaining the flow of the latent accuracy mode insulting effect. It is a transition diagram for explaining the change of the fluctuation state when transitioning from the latent probability variation game state to the normal game state. It is a time chart of the jackpot signal output from the external information terminal board. It is a time chart of the signal during a condominium output from an external information terminal board. It is a time chart of the symbol determination signal output from the external information terminal board. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing by the main control side. 23 is a flowchart showing a control process following the main process on the main control side in FIG. 22. It is a flow chart which shows main control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows winning a prize monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows a starting opening monitoring control process. It is the flowchart which shows the special design fluctuation start supervisory control processing. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start monitoring process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol control process. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol control general-purpose processing. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol variation start process. It is a flowchart showing a process during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop symbol displaying process. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 33 of special symbol stop symbol display processing. It is a flow chart which shows special electric auditors product control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 35 of special electric auditors product control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the control processing following FIG. 36 of special electric auditors product control processing. It is a flowchart which shows a reset start process. It is the flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control command reception interruption processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production control side timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows image control command transmission interruption processing. It is a transition diagram of a game state and an effect mode in a modified example of the present embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production mode table in the modification of this embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the example of an effect of the remaining number notification in the modification of this embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment. It is a time chart of the invincible zone production of the second embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the basic screen of the invincible zone production of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating the fluctuation | variation interruption process of 2nd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the production example of the remaining variation time notification production of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko game machine of 3rd Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows the game state setting table of 3rd Embodiment. It is a variation time comparison table of the special symbol of the third embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a normal symbol winning / winning lottery table of the third embodiment, (B) is a schematic diagram showing a normal symbol variation pattern table of the third embodiment, and (C) is a normal electric combination of the third embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which shows an object opening pattern table. It is a front view of the Pachinko game machine of 4th Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a first special symbol big hit symbol table of the fourth embodiment, (B) is a schematic diagram showing a second special symbol big hit symbol table of the fourth embodiment. It is a variation time comparison table of the special symbol of the fourth embodiment.

  Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

[First Embodiment]
1 and 2 are a front view and a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM will be outlined with reference to these figures. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment is a model in which two functions corresponding to the conventional first type pachinko gaming machine are mixed, and a first game (first special symbol game) and a second game A game (second special symbol game) can be developed.

<Basic configuration of Pachinko machine>
First, the basic structure on the front side of the pachinko game machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine PM (also simply referred to as “gaming machine PM”) is fitted to the opening front surface of the outer frame 1 which is a vertically oriented fixed holding frame configured to have an outer rectangular frame size. A front frame 2 configured to have a rectangular frame size and serving as an open / close mounting frame is attached so as to be opened / closed / removed sideways by the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 arranged at the front left edge of each other, and is attached to the front right edge. A locking device 4 called a double lock provided is used to keep the closed state in which the outer frame 1 is engaged and connected at all times.

  A rectangular glass frame 5 matching the upper front area of the front frame 2 is attached to the front frame 2 using the upper and lower hinge mechanisms 3 so that it can be opened / closed sideways and detachably attached, and the locking device 4 is used. It is always held in a closed state of covering the front surface of the front frame 2. The game board 20 is removably set and held on the front frame 2, and the game area PA in front of the game board 20 is visibly visible through the multilayer glass of the glass frame 5 which is always closed and held. There is.

  On the front side of the glass frame 5, a frame lamp (LED lamp) 10 that emits light according to the development situation of the game and a speaker 11 that produces a sound effect according to the development situation of the game are provided. Upper and lower ball plates (upper ball plate 8 and lower ball plate 9) for storing game balls are provided in the lower part of the glass frame 5, and a player presses the center of the upper ball plate 8 in the front. A button (effect switch) 15 is provided, and a firing handle 12 for performing a game ball firing operation is provided on the right side of the front surface of the lower bowl plate 9. Hereinafter, for the sake of convenience, the operation input means for effect is referred to as an “effect button 15”, but the effect button (effect switch) 15 in this example is an on / off operation type button switch, in the direction of operation input. Cross-shaped switch (cross key, cross button) that outputs according to, tilt-operated lever-type switch, rotary-operated dial switch, proximity that outputs when the player's hand approaches or touches It is used as a concept including all operation input means such as switches, touch sensors, and touch panels.

  The game board 20 is configured based on a substrate formed in a rectangular flat plate shape using a synthetic resin material such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, or an ABS resin. On the front surface of the game board 20, an outer rail 41 and an inner rail 42 are fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which a game ball can roll is defined. Further, a guide passage (not shown) for guiding the game ball to the game area PA is formed by the outer rail 41 and the inner rail 42, and a position near the exit opening of the game ball in this guide passage (of the inner rail 42). At the tip), a ball return prevention valve 43 is arranged to prevent the game balls released from the outlet opening into the game area PA from returning to the guide passage again. In this game area PA, along with a windmill and a large number of game nails, various kinds of first starting opening 51, second starting opening 52, actuation gate 53, special winning opening 54, general winning opening 61, 62, 63, 64, etc. Other than the winning opening, the first special symbol display device 71, the second special symbol display device 72, the first special symbol holding lamp 73, the second special symbol holding lamp 74, the normal symbol display device 75, the universal symbol holding lamp 76, etc. Various display devices are provided. A center ornament 21 is arranged in the approximate center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is visibly provided through the center opening of the center ornament 21. In addition, the game area PA is based on the center decoration 21 in the substantially center, a left area PA1 which is an area on the left side of the center decoration 21 (a board surface area corresponding to left-handing), and an area on the right side of the center decoration 21 (right-handing). And a right side area PA2 which is a board surface area corresponding to. A top plate portion 22 that is opposed to the outer rail 41 in a substantially vertical direction is integrally formed on the upper portion of the center ornament 21, and in the extension of the guide passage, between the top plate portion 22 and the outer rail 41. A communication passage 44 through which the game ball can pass to the right side area PA2 is formed. At the lower end of the game area PA, there is provided an outlet 29 for discharging the game balls rolling down without entering the respective winning openings to the back side of the game board 20. Hereinafter, each constituent element provided on the game board 20 will be described in order.

  The first starting opening 51 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and is provided with a first starting opening switch 511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The first starting opening 51 is a normally open type winning opening that is opened upward, and mainly allows a game ball (left-handed game ball) flowing down the left side area PA1 to enter. The entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 51 is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery.

  The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is provided with a second starting port switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The second starting opening 51 is disposed in the right side area PA2 which is a board surface area corresponding to right-handedness, and a game ball (a right-handed game ball) flowing mainly down the right-hand side area PA2 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52 is a trigger for the second special symbol lottery. The second starting port 52 includes an ordinary electric accessory 522, which is generally referred to as an electric chu, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 522.

  The ordinary electric accessory 522 is changed into an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the second starting opening 52. In other words, the ordinary electric auditors 522 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting opening 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and at a predetermined trigger (an opportunity to win the normal symbol lottery) described later. In the open state, the ease of entering the game ball is increased. The ordinary electric accessory 522 includes a movable member 524 that slides forward and backward to open and close the second starting opening 52. The movable member 524 closes the second starting port 52 to make it difficult or difficult for the game ball to enter, and the second starting port 52 opens to allow the game ball to enter. It is slidable in the front-rear direction (direction orthogonal to the board surface) between an easily opened position (retracted position). The upper surface of the movable member 524 has a passage width of about one game ball or more in the front-rear direction, and is formed to incline downward from the right side to the left side in a front view. Therefore, when the movable member 524 is in the closed position (when the second starting opening 52 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down using the upper surface of the movable member 524 as the guideway, and the guideway on the right to the left. It flows downwards and falls from the left end of the ordinary electric accessory 522.

  Below this normal electric prized object 522, a special electric prized object 542 (large winning hole 54) is arranged, and the game ball passing through the upper surface of the normal electric prized object 522 flows down toward the big winning hole 54. If the special winning opening 54 is open at that time, it is easy for the game ball to enter the special winning opening 54. On the other hand, when the movable member 524 is in the open position (when the second starting port 52 is in the open state), it becomes easy for the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 to enter the second starting port 52. There is. In this example, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 has a board surface design (gauge design) that flows toward the second starting opening 52 (normal electric accessory 522) with a high probability (almost 100%). If the 2 starting port 52 is closed, the game ball is guided to the upper surface of the movable member 524 and flows down toward the special winning port 54, while if the 2nd starting port 52 is open, the game ball is It is configured so that it does not reach the special winning opening 54 by entering the second starting opening 52.

  The operation gate 53 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and is provided with an operation gate switch 531 for detecting passage of a game ball. The passage of the game ball to the actuation gate 53 is a trigger for the ordinary symbol lottery for determining whether to open the second starting opening 52.

  The special winning opening 54 is formed as a horizontal rectangular winning opening that is opened when the winning / winning lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The special winning opening 54 is a special winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a big winning for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. And a mouth solenoid 543. The special electric accessory 542 is changed into an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the special winning opening 54. In this example, the special winning opening 54 is provided in the right side area PA2 in the game area PA. Therefore, in the special game (big hit game, small hit game), when the game ball is shot, by hitting the right side area PA2, that is, by so-called right hitting, it is easy to enter the big winning opening 54. Has become.

  The general winning openings 61 to 63 are arranged in the left side area PA1 which is a board area corresponding to left-handed play, and the game balls flowing down the left side area PA1 can enter. The general winning openings 61 to 63 are provided with a general winning opening switch 611 for detecting the entry of a game ball. This general winning opening switch 611 is configured as a common sensor (single sensor) for the three general winning openings 61 to 63 from the viewpoint of cost reduction and the like. Spheres can also be detected. In addition, the entry of the game balls into each of the general winning openings 61-63 does not trigger the lottery of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol, but the trigger of winning the prize ball like other winning orifices (excluding the operation gate 53). Becomes

  Of the various winning openings described above, the first starting opening 51 and the actuation gate 53, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fixedly displayed as a stop symbol indicating a big hit (the condition device described later is When it operates), it also serves as the combination operation gates 91 and 92, which serve as a trigger for executing the big hit game. The first starting opening 51 also serves as a first winning combination operation gate 91 into which a game ball flowing down the left side area PA can enter, and a first winning combination operation gate switch 911 for detecting the entrance of the game ball. I have it. The operating gate 53 also serves as a second winning combination operating gate 92 through which the game balls flowing down the right side area PA2 can pass, and includes a second winning combination operating gate switch 921 for detecting the passage of the gaming balls. In the following, the terms “entering” and “passing” of the game ball to the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92 are synonymously interpreted, and the term “passing” is mainly used.

  In the present embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fixedly displayed as a stop symbol (big hit symbol) indicating a big hit, the game ball is the first winning combination operation gate 91 or the second winning combination. A big hit game is started on condition that the operation gate 92 is passed. In the following, after the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fixedly displayed as a stop symbol (big hit symbol) indicating a big hit, the game ball is the first combination continuous operation gate 91 or the second combination continuous operation. The period until the game passes through the gate 92 (until the big hit game is started) is also referred to as a "waiting state for the big hit game". Therefore, even if the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a big hit symbol, the big hit game is not started unless the game ball passes through any of the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92 ( The waiting state of the big hit game continues). Here, the time from when the game ball passes through the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92 after the stop display of the big hit symbol to the start of the first round of the big hit game (that is, big hit start demonstration time), the big hit It may be different depending on the game state when the symbols are stopped and displayed. In particular, a relatively short time (eg: 1 second) when a big hit is made in a latent probability variation game state (or a probability variation game state or a time saving game state), which will be described later, and a relatively long time when a big hit is made in a normal game state (example : 10 seconds). The reason is that when a big hit occurs in the latent probability variation game state (or probability variation game state or time saving game state), the consortium speed (continuous big hit rate) is increased. On the other hand, when you want to slow down the Renso speed, when you hit big in the latent probability variation game state (or probability variation game state or time saving game state), it is a relatively long time (eg 10 seconds), when you hit big in the normal game state May be a relatively short time (eg: 1 second). On the other hand, for the small hit game, it is not necessary for the game ball to pass through the combination operation operation gates 91 and 92, and the small hit game is actively started (only when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed). It is possible. From the viewpoint of cost reduction and space saving, a configuration may be adopted in which the combination operation gate switches 911 and 921 are shared with the first starting port switch 511 and the operation gate switch 531 respectively. Further, the combination operation gates 91 and 92 may be provided not as the first starting port 51 and the operating gate 53 but as a configuration independent of the first starting port 51 and the operating gate 53. When each of the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92 is configured separately from the first starting port 51 and the operating gate 53, the left winning combination operation gate 91 is arranged near the upstream side of the first starting port 51. In addition, the right winning combination operation gate 92 is arranged in the vicinity of the upstream side of the operation gate 53 or the special winning opening 54, and the game ball flowing down toward the first starting opening 51 has a high frequency (100% probability is also acceptable. ), The game ball passing through the left winning combination operating gate 91 and flowing down toward the operating gate 53 or the special winning opening 54 passes through the right winning combination operating gate 92 at a high frequency (100% probability is acceptable). May be adopted. In addition, when the first combination operation gate 91 is formed of a member different from the first starting port 51, it may be arranged directly below the first starting port 51 or in a left / right or up / down direction with the first starting port 51. In addition, as a modified example of the present embodiment, a configuration in which only the first winning combination operating gate 91 is arranged (a configuration in which the second winning combination operating gate 92 is not arranged) or a structure in which only the second winning combination operating gate 92 is arranged (first A configuration in which the single-role continuous operation gate 91 is not arranged may be adopted.

  The first special symbol display device 71 performs a variable display and a fixed display of the first special symbol, triggered by the game ball entering the first starting opening 51. The first special symbol display device 71 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, the variable display of the first special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The first special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  The second special symbol display device 72 performs the variable display and the fixed display of the second special symbol when the game ball enters the second starting opening 52. The second special symbol display device 72 is composed of, for example, eight LED lamps, the variable display of the second special symbol is expressed according to the blinking pattern of the lamp, and the blinking of the lamp is stopped and switched to the lighting display. The second special symbol is confirmed and displayed.

  The 1st special figure reservation lamp 73 and the 2nd special figure reservation lamp 74 respectively consist of, for example, two LED lamps, and the number of operation reserved balls of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is indicated by the lighting / flashing of the lamp. Express (up to 4 each). The number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is a number according to the random number value obtained based on the ball entering the first starting opening 51 during the change of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or the execution of the big hit game. Yes, it indicates the number for which the obtained random number is suspended, that is, the acceptance determination is suspended until the acceptance determination permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random value. Similarly, the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is a random number value obtained based on the ball entering the second starting opening 52 while the first special symbol or the second special symbol is changing or during the big hit game. It is a number related to this, and indicates the number for which the acceptance judgment is once suspended until the acquired random number value is suspended, that is, until the acceptance determination permission condition (variation start condition) is satisfied for the acquired random value. There is.

  The normal symbol display device 75 is composed of, for example, two LED lamps, and performs variable display and final display of normal symbols. The universal figure holding lamp 76 is composed of, for example, four lamps, and the number of lighting of the lamp is equivalent to the number of holdings of the normal symbol fluctuation (the number of normal symbol fluctuations which have not been executed yet). In addition, on the left side of the normal symbol display device 75, a round display 77 for displaying the number of round games (unit games) in the big hit game (the number of rounds: the number of times the special electric auditors product 542 continuously operates) is provided. ing.

  The effect display device 70 mainly includes a change effect of a decorative symbol that is displayed in a variable display / stop display in conjunction with the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and a notice effect that indicates or informs the expectation of a big hit in advance. While displaying the image, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are held and displayed. Specifically, on the screen of the effect display device 70, a decorative symbol display unit 700 for performing variable display of decorative symbols, notice effect display, and the like, a first special figure holding lamp 73, and a second special figure holding lamp 74. A holding image display unit 710 is provided in which the holding display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in synchronization with. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the effect display device 70. In the decorative symbol display portion 700, three columns of display regions (left display region Z1, middle display region Z2, right display region Z3) which are variable display regions of the decorative symbol are provided on a predetermined effective line (not shown). That is, the left symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the left display region Z1, the middle symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the middle display region Z2, and the right symbol of the decorative symbol corresponds to the right display region Z3. It has become so. In the normal display mode, the reserved image display unit 710 displays a reserved image (holding icon) of a predetermined mode when the operation-holding sphere of the special symbol is generated, while the operation-holding sphere is consumed. The held image disappears. This reserved image is displayed in order according to the generation order of the operation reserved balls of special symbols (ball entry order), and a maximum of eight (four reserved images of the first special symbol and four reserved images of the second special symbol). Can be displayed.

  The center decoration 21 is installed around the effect display device 70 and has functions such as a flow path for game balls, protection of effect screens, and decoration. The center ornament 21 is provided with a movable accessory 24 that performs a rendering operation according to the development situation of the game. The movable accessory 24 is configured to include a motor M (for example, a stepping motor) as a drive source. In addition, the game board 20 is provided with a board lamp (LED lamp) 25 that emits light in accordance with the development status of the game. In the following description, for the sake of convenience, the frame lamp 10 and the panel lamp 25 are also collectively referred to as “effect lamp LP”.

  Subsequently, the basic structure of the back side of the pachinko game machine PM will be described with reference to FIG. On the back side of the front frame 2, there is a back set board 30 that has a window in the center that communicates with the front and back and is based on a base frame body formed in a rectangular frame shape slightly smaller than the front frame 2. A hinge mechanism 3 is connected to the rear side of the front frame 2 so as to open, close, open, and detach. A back set cover 30C in the form of a rectangular box with an open front is detachably attached to the back set board 30, and is normally disposed so as to cover the back side of the game board 20 attached to the front frame 2. (Thus, the main control board 100, the effect control board 200, and the image control board 300, which will be described later, are covered by the back set cover 30C).

  In each part of the back set board 30, a storage tank 31 for storing a large number of game balls, a tank rail 32 extending from the storage tank 31 to the right with a gentle downward slope, and a lower end connected to the right end of the tank rail 32. A ball supply passage portion 33 extending to, a prize ball payout unit 34 for paying out the game ball guided by the ball supply passage portion 33, a prize for guiding the game ball paid out from the prize ball payout unit 34 to the upper ball plate 6. A ball passage portion 35 and the like are provided.

  On the back side of the game board 10, a main control board 100 that totally controls the operation of the pachinko game machine PM, a production control board 200 that controls overall production, image display according to game development, and control of sound effects. An image control board 300 for performing the above is attached. On the other hand, on the back side of the back set board 30, a payout control board 400 that controls the launch and payout of game balls, and a power supply from the game facility side to supply power to various control boards and electric / electronic components. An external information terminal board 600 (see FIG. 3) that outputs an external information signal (outer end signal) is attached to the outside of the power supply board 500 and the gaming machine PM. In order to prevent unauthorized modification, these control boards are assembled in a transparent resin board case having a caulking structure and a sealing seal structure, and are respectively assembled at predetermined positions on the rear surface of the game board 20 or the rear setting board 30 in an assembled state. It is arranged. These control boards and electric / electronic parts of each part of the pachinko gaming machine PM are mutually connected via a harness (connector cable), and the pachinko gaming machine PM is configured to be operable.

<Control configuration of Pachinko game machine>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, each control board mounted on the pachinko gaming machine PM according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing a control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine PM.

  The main control board 100 is a main CPU 101 that performs various kinds of arithmetic processing related to games, a ROM 102 that stores control programs and various data, a RAM 103 that functions as a work area or a buffer memory serving as a temporary storage area, peripheral boards and each A main control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 110 including an I / O port circuit 104 for inputting / outputting signals to / from a device is mounted, and a main CPU 101 plays a game according to a control program stored in a ROM 102. It is configured to execute the main control relating to the progress. In addition, although not shown, the main control board 100 is reset by a clock circuit that divides a clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock, and when the main CPU 101 malfunctions or goes into a runaway state. The WDT circuit for returning to a normal state, the CTC circuit for enabling real-time interrupt generation and time measurement, and the program processing (software random number) by the main CPU 101 operate as a separate system to generate a predetermined random number (internal random number). A random number generation circuit and the like are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

  The main CPU 101 reads various control programs stored in the ROM 102 and performs arithmetic processing based on the detection information from each switch, thereby executing various processing relating to main control of the game. The RAM 103 is a backup RAM serving as a non-volatile storage unit that is backed up by a backup power supply generated in the power supply board 500. The backup area of the RAM 103 is an area for storing data such as stack pointers and registers held when the power is cut off when the power is cut off. ) Indicates that the state of the gaming machine is restored to the state before the power is turned off based on the information in the backup area.

  In addition, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operating gate switch 531, the special winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, the winning operation gate switches 911, 921, and the like. And the detection signals from various switches are input to the main CPU 101 via the I / O port circuit 104. Further, the main control board 100, the first special symbol display device 71, the second special symbol display device 72, the first special symbol holding lamp 73, the second special symbol holding lamp 74, the normal symbol display device 75 and the general symbol holding lamp. The control signal from the main CPU 101 is electrically connected to the normal electric accessory solenoid 523 and the special electric accessory solenoid 543 while being electrically connected to the main CPU 101 through the I / O port circuit 104. Send to display means and various solenoids. Further, the main control board 100 is electrically connected to the external information terminal board 600, and transmits a game information signal from the main CPU 101 to the external terminal board 600 via the I / O port 104. This external information terminal board 600 sends various external information signals to an external device (data display, hall computer, etc.) installed outside the gaming machine PM based on the game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100. Send. The game information signal transmitted from the main control board 100 may be input to the external information terminal board 600 via, for example, the payout control board 300.

  The main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are connected by eight parallel signal lines and one strobe line, and communication is performed only in a single direction from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Various control commands are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200. Data cannot be transmitted from the production control board 200 to the main control board 100, and the main control board 100 cannot be requested to transmit data.

  The effect control board 200 is a sub-main CPU 201 that performs various arithmetic processing related to game effect based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, a ROM 202 that stores effect control programs and various data, a work area that serves as a temporary storage area, A performance control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 210 including a RAM 203 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 204 that inputs and outputs signals to and from a peripheral board and each device is mounted. The sub-main CPU 201 is configured to execute main control relating to game effects according to a control program stored in the ROM 202. In addition, although not shown, the production control board 200 is reset when a clock circuit that divides a clock signal from a crystal oscillator to generate an internal system clock and the sub-main CPU 201 malfunctions or runs out of control. WDT circuit for returning to a normal state by a timer, a TPU circuit for outputting various signals based on the system clock, an interrupt controller for activating various interrupts such as timer interrupts based on signals from the TPU circuit, for inputting / outputting serial data A serial communication circuit and the like are mounted, and these are connected to each other via an internal bus.

  The effect control board 200 is an effect control process based on the effect control command from the main control board 100, and is an image control command for instructing an image and sound to the image control board 300, and a lamp control signal for controlling the lamp connection board 91. (Lamp data), a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92, and the like are generated. The effect control board 200 is connected to the image control board 300 so as to be able to perform two-way communication, and an image control command related to an image and a sound is transmitted from the effect control board 200 to the image control board 300. A response command (ACK command) indicating that the image control command has been normally received is transmitted from the image control board 300 to the effect control board 200.

  In addition, the production control board 200 is electrically connected to a lamp connection board 91 having a plurality of LED drivers mounted thereon, and outputs a lamp control signal (lamp data) for controlling the lamp connection board 91 via a serial communication circuit. Send. In this example, the production control board 200 and the lamp connection board 91 employ clock-synchronous serial communication, and are transmitted by a signal line (clock line) different from the data line for lamp data transmission. The lamp control signal is transmitted bit by bit through the data line in synchronization with the clock signal. The lamp connection board 91 has a built-in LED driver that functions by receiving a lamp control signal for LED driving transmitted from the effect control board 200, and switches on / off a switch in the circuit based on the lamp control signal. Thus, control is performed to supply or cut off the drive current to the effect lamp LP and turn on or off the effect lamp LP.

  Further, the effect control board 200 is electrically connected to the plurality of motor drivers 92, and sends a drive control signal (drive data) for controlling the motor driver 92 to the motor driver 92 via the I / O port circuit 204. Send. The motor driver 92 supplies a drive current to the stepping motor of each movable accessory 24 by turning on / off a switch in the circuit based on a drive control signal for driving the accessory that is transmitted from the effect control board 200. Alternatively, the control is performed by shutting off and operating each movable accessory 24. A parallel communication method is used for data transmission to the motor driver 92.

  The image control board 300 includes a sub-sub CPU 301 that performs various kinds of arithmetic processing related to image production based on an image control command from the effect control board 200, a ROM 302 that stores an image control program and various data, and a work area that serves as a temporary storage area. An image control microcomputer (one-chip microcomputer) 310 including a RAM 303 that functions as a buffer memory and an I / O port circuit 304 that inputs and outputs signals to and from a peripheral board and each device is mounted. The sub-sub CPU 301 is configured to execute main control relating to image effects according to a control program stored in the ROM 302. In addition, although not shown in the figure, the VDP that generates image data according to the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301 and the effect content based on the control signal acquired from the sub-sub CPU 301 are provided on the image control board 300. It is equipped with a sound source IC that generates acoustic data. The VDP is a so-called image processor, which reads image data stored in the image ROM in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and transmits a video signal (image data) generated by performing image processing on the image data to the effect display device. A high-speed VRAM used for developing / processing the image data read from the image ROM is connected to the VDP. The sound source IC reads the acoustic data stored in the audio ROM in response to an instruction from the sub-sub CPU 301, and outputs the acoustic data generated by synthesizing the acoustic data to the speaker 11 via an amplifier (digital amplifier).

  The payout control board 400 mainly includes a payout CPU 401, a ROM 402, and a RAM 403. The payout control board 400 is connected to the main control board 100 so as to be capable of bidirectional communication, and is a control for driving the prize ball payout unit 34 based on a payout control command from the main control board 100 to pay out prize balls. While executing, the ball feed mechanism 13 and the firing mechanism 14 are synchronously driven based on the operation amount of the firing handle 12 to control the firing of the game ball.

  Although not shown in detail, the power supply board 500 is a backup power supply and a normal power supply circuit for generating a normal power supply used in each control board based on the primary power supply supplied from the power supply facility of the game island. A power supply required for electronic and electrical parts such as control boards and amusement machines, and a backup power supply circuit for generating To supply. A power switch for activating a power circuit is connected to the power board 500, and assuming that the primary power is supplied from the power supply device of the game island, when the power switch is turned on, the power board is turned on. Predetermined power is supplied to each control board or the like from the normal power supply circuit 500. The power supply board 500 is configured to be able to detect that the power supply from the power supply device of the game island has been cut off, and at the time of detecting the power supply cutoff, the main control board 100 receives a power cutoff signal (NMI signal) for notifying the fact. , To the effect control board 200 and the payout control board 400. In addition, the backup power supply circuit is configured to be charged when power is supplied to the pachinko gaming machine PM from the power supply device of the gaming island. Further, a RAM clear switch (not shown) for temporarily erasing the temporarily stored contents of the RAM 103 of the main control board 100 and setting an initial value when the power of the pachinko game machine PM is turned on is connected to the power supply board 500. ing. The RAM clear switch may be connected to, for example, the main control board 100 instead of the power supply board 500.

<Basic operation of Pachinko machine>
In the pachinko gaming machine PM configured as described above, the outer frame 1 is fixedly installed on the game island of the game facility, and the front frame 2, the glass frame 5, etc. are closed and locked, and the game is performed. The game is started by storing the game balls in the plate 8 and rotating the firing handle 12. When the firing handle 12 is rotated, the game balls stored in the upper ball plate 8 are delivered to the firing mechanism 14 one by one by the ball delivery mechanism 13 arranged on the back side of the glass frame 5. The shooting mechanism 14 launches the game area PA. At this time, when the firing handle 12 is operated less than the predetermined amount, the game ball does not reach the right side area PA2 but flows down the left side area PA1. The left side area PA1 is formed with a left side flow path for flowing down the game ball toward the first starting opening 51 and the general winning openings 61 to 63. On the other hand, when the firing handle 12 is operated by a predetermined amount or more, the game ball reaches the right side area PA2 and flows down the right side area PA2. In the right side area PA2, a right side flow path for flowing down the game ball toward the second starting opening 52, the operation gate 53, and the special winning opening 54 is formed. In this way, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 or the right side area PA2 has a first starting port 51, a second starting port 52, and an operating gate 53 according to the route sorted by the left side area PA1 or the right side area PA1. While the player can enter any of the special winning opening 54 and the general winning openings 61 to 63, if the player does not enter any of the winning openings, it is flown down to the out opening 29.

  When a game ball flowing down in the game area PA enters any of the first starting opening 51, the second starting opening 52, the special winning opening 54, and the general winning openings 61 to 63, an award corresponding to the type of the winning opening. The balls are paid out to the upper ball plate 8 or the lower ball plate 9 by the prize ball payout unit 34. In the present embodiment, as the number of prize balls (number of unit prize balls) to be paid out when one game ball enters each prize hole, the first starting port 51 is "4" and the second starting port 52 is " 1 ”, the general winning openings 61 to 64 are set to“ 3 ”, and the special winning opening 54 is set to“ 10 ”. Note that the number of unit prize balls is not limited to that illustrated in this embodiment, and other unit prize balls may be applied. For example, the number of unit prize balls may be “4” for the first starting opening 51, “3” for the second starting opening 52, “5” for the general winning openings 61-64.

  When the game ball enters the first starting port 51 or the second starting port 52, the random number random number value of the special symbol is acquired, and the random number value is temporarily stored as the operation reserve ball of the special symbol up to a predetermined upper limit number. Then, if the predetermined start condition (variable start condition of the special symbol described later) is satisfied, the special symbol win / fail judgment, the symbol determination, and the variation pattern determination are performed with respect to the lottery random number value related to the first operation holding ball. In a mode according to the determination result, the special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72, and the decorative symbol is variably displayed on the effect display device 70. The variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed synchronously after the lapse of the variation time corresponding to the selected variation pattern.

  When the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed in a stop mode indicating a big hit, a special game (big hit game) that is more advantageous to the player than a normal game is performed. In each round game (unit game) of this big hit game, an opening / closing operation for changing the special winning opening 54 to the open state only once or a plurality of times is performed. When a specified number of game balls enter the special winning opening 54, or when the opening time of the special winning opening 54 reaches the open limit time, the running round game ends. Here, the stop mode of the decorative symbol indicating the big hit is a mode in which, for example, the types of the three symbols match. In the present embodiment, when the special symbol and the decorative symbol are fixedly displayed in the stop mode indicating the big hit, a plurality of round games (unit games) are executed as the big hit game.

  In the present embodiment, when a predetermined big hit is won, the probability change function of the special symbol may operate from the end of the big hit game until the change number of the special symbol reaches a predetermined end number. When the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is activated, the big hit probability of the special symbol lottery shifts from the normal low probability state to the high probability state, so that a new big hit (big hit game) occurs relatively early. Become. The special symbol probability variation function may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, "10000 times", which is substantially equivalent to the number of times of variable display until the next big hit occurs, may be set as the predetermined number of end times.

  Also, after the jackpot game is over, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol may operate in association with or independently of the probability varying function of the special symbol. When the variation time shortening function of the special symbol operates, the average variation time of the special symbol and the decorative symbol tends to be shorter than usual, and the number of special symbol lottery per unit time improves (the jackpot per unit time It can increase the ease of acquisition).

  Further, after the jackpot game is over, the electric chewing support function may operate in association with or independently of the variable time reduction function of the special symbol. The electric Chu support function, the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol, the variation time shortening function of the ordinary symbol, and the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 522 actuate to enhance the ease of entering the second starting opening 52. This is a state (also referred to as an "easy entry state"). In addition, when the probability variation function of the ordinary symbol operates, the winning probability of the ordinary symbol becomes higher than the normal state. When the variation time reduction function of the normal symbol is activated, the variation time of the normal symbol is reduced. When the opening time extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 522 operates, the opening time of the ordinary electric accessory 522 becomes longer than the normal state. In this easy-to-enter state, the number of fluctuations of the ordinary symbol per certain time is more likely to increase than usual, and the easiness of entering the second starting port 52 is also enhanced, so to the second starting port 52. The possibility that the number of incoming balls will increase will also increase. Therefore, the operation of the electric Chu support function increases the chances of obtaining a prize ball by entering the second starting opening 52 during the period, and as a result, it is possible to continue the game without reducing the number of balls held. Become. In other words, the base, which is the ratio of the number of prize balls to the number of game balls to be launched, increases. Hereinafter, a state in which the electric Chu support function is operating is also referred to as a “high base state”, and a state in which the electric Chu support function is not operating is also referred to as a “low base state”.

  On the other hand, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is fixedly displayed in the stop mode showing the small hit, the small hit game with a lower profit degree than the big hit game is transferred. In this small hit game, the opening / closing operation for changing the big winning opening 54 to the open state only once or a plurality of times is performed. When a specified number of game balls enter the special winning opening 54, or when the opening time of the special winning opening 54 reaches the open limit time, the small hit game ends.

<Main functions of Pachinko machine>
Next, various functions of the pachinko gaming machine PM (mainly the main control board 100 / effect control board 200) according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to the functional block diagram of FIG. 4.

  As shown in FIG. 4, the main control board 100 is a ball entry determination means 110, a game lottery random number generation means 120, a hold control means 130, a preliminary determination means 135, a special symbol lottery processing means 140, an ordinary symbol lottery processing means 145, It includes special game control means 150, symbol display control means 155, electric accessory control means 160, game state control means 165, error monitoring control means 170, main information storage means 180, command transmission / reception means 190. Each of the above-mentioned means in the main control board 100 is configured by a main CPU 101, a ROM 102, a RAM 103 provided on the main control board 100, hardware such as an electronic circuit, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 102 and the like. It is a functional representation of something.

  The winning determination means 110 is detected from the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operating gate switch 531, the special winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, the winning operation gate switches 911, 921, and the like. Based on the signal, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered each winning opening. When the first start opening switch 511 detects the entry of the game ball, the entry determination means 110 generates an effect control command (to be referred to as a "first starting entry winning command") indicating that, When the entry of the game ball is detected by the 2 start opening switch 521, a production control command (to be referred to as a “second start opening winning command”) indicating that is generated, and the operation gate switch 531 is operated to switch the game ball. When the passage is detected, an effect control command (to be referred to as an "operation gate winning command") indicating that is generated, and when the winning of the game ball is detected by the special winning opening switch 541, the effect is indicated. When a production control command (referred to as a "big winning award winning command") is generated, and a ball of a game ball is detected by the general award opening switch 611, an effect control command ("General award winning command") indicating that When the passing of the game ball is detected by the combination operation operation gate switches 911 and 921, an effect control command (referred to as “combination operation operation gate winning command”) indicating that is generated. This is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The game lottery random number generation means 120 takes in a built-in random number generated by the random number generation circuit of the main control microcomputer 110 by software, and adds a soft random number per special symbol described later to this, and is used for the winning / winning lottery of the special symbol. Generate a random number per special symbol. Further, the game lottery random number generating means 120 is provided with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers by the program processing of the main CPU 101. These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. As this software random number, a special random number per special symbol to be added to the above-mentioned built-in random number for generating a random number per random number, an initial value for a new update after one cycle of the special random number is finished Special initial value random number per special symbol to determine the special symbol stop symbol random number, special symbol stop symbol random number used to determine the symbol (combination of symbols that activates the condition device) as a special symbol stop symbol Of the special symbol stop symbol initial value random number for determining the initial value for making a new update after the update of one cycle is finished, the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number used for selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, Random number per normal symbol to be used in the winning or failure lottery of the normal symbol, the initial value for making a new update after the end of the update of one cycle of the random number per ordinary symbol Determining normal symbol per initial value random number for, and the like normal symbol variation pattern random number for use in selecting the change pattern of the normal symbol. These software random numbers are updated once every time the timer interrupt process occurs (increment, decrement, addition of prime numbers, etc.), and the initial value random numbers are set while the timer interrupt process is not being executed ( (Loop processing) is also updated using the remaining time of the interrupt cycle.

  Hold control means 130 includes a special symbol hold control means 131, a normal symbol hold control means 132 ,.

  The special symbol hold control means 131 is a lottery random number value related to the special symbol game, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 51 or the second starting opening 52, a random number per special symbol, per special symbol. The symbol random number value, the special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value is acquired, and the random number value is managed as the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol holding control means 131 is a main information storage means in a manner that the operation holding ball information of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is combined with the entry order of the holding balls up to a predetermined upper limit number (four), respectively. It is temporarily stored in the first special symbol hold storage area or the second special symbol hold storage area of 180.

  In the first special symbol reserved storage area and the second special symbol reserved storage area, in the order of entering the starting ports 51, 52, the reserved 1 storage area (first reserved storage area), the reserved 2 storage area (2 The third reserved storage area), the third reserved storage area (third reserved storage area), and the fourth reserved storage area (fourth reserved storage area) are respectively provided. Each reservation storage area can store a random number per special symbol, a symbol random number per special symbol, and a special symbol variation pattern random number as a set as operation reserve ball information. The operation holding ball information is stored in the order of the holding 1 storage area, the holding 2 storage area, the holding 3 storage area, and the holding 4 storage area, while the holding 1 storage area, the holding 2 storage area, the holding 3 storage area, and the holding 4 storage. Areas are digested in order (first-in first-out principle). Further, when the reserved sphere information in the reserved 1 storage area is exhausted, the reserved sphere information stored in the reserved 2 storage area, the reserved 3 storage area, and the reserved 4 storage area is respectively shifted to the lower numbered storage areas, and Clears the contents of the hold 4 storage area to zero.

  Further, the special symbol holding control means 131, the first special symbol holding ball number counter for counting the operation holding ball number of the first special symbol, and the second for counting the operation holding ball number of the second special symbol. It has a special symbol holding ball number counter. The special symbol holding control means 131, as the update processing of the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol, each time one operation holding ball of the special symbol is acquired, the corresponding counter is incremented by 1, and one operation holding ball is consumed. The corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

  Further, the special symbol holding control means 131, when the operation holding ball number of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is updated (addition or subtraction), the production control command including the update information of the holding ball number ("symbol storage" (Hereinafter, referred to as “several commands”) and is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. This 1 command includes information on both the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol.

  Special symbol hold control means 131, when the variation start condition of the first special symbol described later is satisfied, the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol (first operation reserved ball) is digested, the second special symbol described later. When the variation start condition of is satisfied, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol (the earliest operation holding ball) is digested. In the present embodiment, the determination of the variation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the variation start condition of the second special symbol are independently performed, and thus the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 71. The variable display and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 72 are configured to be performed in parallel. That is, by separately and independently digesting the operation holding ball of the first special symbol and the operation holding ball of the second special symbol, for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, corresponding winning / absence lottery and variable display The so-called parallel model is used, which performs such tasks in parallel. Therefore, even if the variation display of one special symbol is performed for a long time among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the variation display of this one special symbol. Therefore, while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol is not delayed.

  The normal symbol holding control means 132 is a lottery random number value related to the normal symbol game when the game ball enters the actuation gate 53 as a trigger, a random number value per ordinary symbol, a random symbol value per ordinary symbol, and a regular symbol fluctuation pattern. A random number value is acquired, and the random number value is managed as operation-holding sphere information of a normal symbol. The normal symbol hold control means 132 is a normal symbol hold storage area of the main information storage means 180 in a form in which the operation hold ball information of the normal symbol is combined with the incoming order of the hold balls up to a predetermined upper limit number (4 pieces). Store temporarily. Further, the normal symbol holding control means 132 has a normal symbol holding ball number counter for counting the operation holding ball number of the normal symbol. Normal symbol hold control means 132, as an update process of the number of holding balls of the working normal symbol, increments the corresponding counter every time one operation holding ball of the normal symbol is acquired, and one working holding ball is consumed. The corresponding counter is decremented by 1.

  The pre-determination unit 135, when acquiring the operation reserve ball of the special symbol at a predetermined pre-determination timing, executes the pre-determination for the pre-reading notice for the operation reserve ball. As an example of the above-described pre-determination timing, (1) waiting for a hit, and when the operation reserve ball of the first special symbol is acquired while the electric Chu support function is not in operation, (2) waiting for a hit, and If you get the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol while the electric Chu support function is operating, (3) If you obtain the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol during a big hit or a small hit, one of It is time to meet the conditions. In addition, the above-mentioned pre-determination timing is an example, and the pre-determination timing is changed according to the gaming machine specifications (for example, it has a starting opening according to the second special symbol that does not have an ordinary electric accessory, and holds 8 pieces at normal times. In the model that can be stored, the above (1) may be applied not only to the first special symbol but also to the second special symbol, etc.), or a specification may be adopted in which the preliminary determination is made at any time without providing the preliminary determination timing. Further, in each gaming state, only the operation reserve ball of the special symbol that is the main subject of the game may be the target of pre-determination, for example, in the normal gaming state, only the operation reserve ball of the first special symbol is the target of pre-determination. Then, in the time saving game state, the latent probability variation game state, and the probability variation game state, it is preferable to target only the operation holding ball of the second special symbol for the preliminary determination. Specifically, the pre-determination means 135 reads a random number value corresponding to the operation holding ball acquired this time from the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area of the main information storage means 180, and whether or not it is true or false. Pre-determination (validity / priority determination), symbol pre-determination (symbol pre-determination), variation pattern pre-determination (variation pattern pre-determination) are sequentially executed. The pre-determination table used in each pre-determination is not shown in the drawing, but each of the success / failure pre-determination table, the pattern pre-determination table, and the variation pattern pre-determination table is divided into a plurality of regions corresponding to the total number of random numbers. Then, a lottery ID (a number indicating the result of the preliminary determination (also referred to as “preliminary determination number”)) is assigned to each of the regions (determination number). Therefore, the result of this pre-determination is based on the result of the main lottery by the special symbol lottery processing means 140 described later (results of winning / losing determination, results of symbol determination, results of variation pattern determination). In addition, the win / fail pre-determination table, the symbol pre-determination table, etc. may be the same as the win / no win lottery table or the design lottery table used for the lottery when the fluctuation is actually started. Here, in the fluctuation pattern pre-determination table, the game situation at the start of fluctuation (presence or absence of probability change, presence or absence of time reduction, whether or not during a limited frequency period referring to the special table, number of reserved balls, etc.) may change. Therefore, as described above, it is more desirable to determine which of the plurality of areas is included. Further, as a modification, it is configured to pre-determine a random number value of a register or the like on the main CPU 101 that is temporarily stored before being stored in the first special symbol reserved storage area or the second special symbol reserved storage area. You may. Then, the pre-determination unit 135 sequentially generates an effect control command (referred to as “pre-determination command”) including information on the result of the pre-determination (pre-determination number), and this is generated in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. To store.

  The special symbol lottery processing unit 140 includes a special symbol winning / discarding determination unit 141, a special symbol stop symbol determining unit 412, and a special symbol variation pattern determining unit 143. The special symbol lottery processing means 140, when the variation start condition of the special symbol is satisfied, the special symbol perturbation stored in the first storage area (holding 1 storage area) of the special symbol holding storage area in the main information storage means 180. Numerical value, symbol random number value per special symbol, special symbol fluctuation pattern random number value is read, and this is stored in the special symbol appropriateness judgment area, the special symbol judgment area, and the special symbol fluctuation pattern judgment area of the main information storage means 180, respectively. Here, the "variation start condition of the first special symbol" means that (A1) is not a big hit or a small hit, (A2) the first special symbol is waiting for a change, (A3) the first special It is the existence of the operation reserve ball of the design. When all of these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the first special symbol is in a state in which variation start is possible (variation start condition is satisfied). On the other hand, the "variation start condition of the second special symbol" means that (B1) is not a big hit or a small hit, (B2) the second special symbol is waiting for change, (B3) the second special symbol. That is, there is an operation holding ball. When all these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the second special symbol is in a state in which fluctuation start is possible (condition in which the fluctuation start condition is satisfied).

  The special symbol hit determination unit 141 reads the random number per special symbol from the special symbol hit determination region of the main information storage unit 180 and executes the hit determination, and the determination result corresponds to either a big hit, a small hit, or a hit. Decide what to do. The result of the hit / miss determination is temporarily stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180 (for example, big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, outlier data “00H”), and is used in the subsequent processing. After the change, the special symbol will be cleared when it stops changing. The special symbol win / loss determination means 141 holds a special symbol win / loss table that is referred to in the win / loss determination.

  Here, FIG. 5 is a diagram schematically showing a special symbol winning / winning lottery table. In the figure, (A) is referred to in the gaming state (low probability state) in which the special symbol probability variation function is not operating, and (B) is a gaming state in which the special symbol probability variation function is operating (high probability state). ). In this special symbol winning / losing lottery table, the random number range of the random number per special symbol and the result of winning / swapping determination (big hit, small hit, out) are associated with each other. As shown in FIG. 5, in the determination of whether or not the special symbol is in the gaming state (low probability state) in which the probability varying function of the special symbol is not operating, the random value per special symbol is in the range of “0 to 204” When it corresponds to, it becomes a big hit, and when it is a gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is operating, when the random value per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 818", it becomes a big hit. Becomes That is, when the probability varying function of the special symbol operates, the winning probability of the big hit varies from the low probability “1/320” to the high probability “1/80”. In this way, the winning probability of the big hit changes according to the gaming state, but the winning probability of the big hit is designed to be the same in the winning / failing judgment of the first special symbol and the winning judgment of the second special symbol. Here, even if the result of the winning / disallowing judgment does not correspond to the big hit, in the winning / disallowing judgment of the second special symbol, the small hit is won with a relatively high probability “1 / 1.1”. The winning probability of the small hit is designed to be the same winning probability regardless of the gaming state (low probability state, high probability state). In the present embodiment, the small hit is set only for the hit determination of the second special symbol, but for example, the small hit is also set for the hit determination of the first special symbol, which is more than the hit determination of the first special symbol. It may be configured to win the small hit with a higher probability that the determination of whether or not the two special symbols are won.

<Big hit no lottery processing>
Here, the big hit non-lottery process will be described as the special symbol win / loss determination process. FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram for explaining the big hit non-lottery process in the present embodiment. In the figure (A), when the first special symbol is being displayed as a big hit or out of focus, the result that can be derived as the result of the judgment of the second special symbol is "○", and the result that cannot be derived is " It is indicated by "X". In the figure (B), when the second special symbol is a big hit, a small hit or a variation display of the outfall, the result that can be derived as the result of the judgment of the first special symbol is "○", cannot be derived. The result is indicated by "x".

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, one of the special symbols is the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and the special symbol is being displayed variably (while the big jackpot is being displayed. ), If the other special symbol win / loss determination is executed, it is prohibited to derive a big hit as a result of the other special symbol win / loss determination, and only a small hit or outlier is derived. When the result of the hit determination of the other special symbol corresponds to the big hit, the result of the hit determination is forcibly replaced with the big hit. In other words, in the above special symbol win / loss table, when the gaming state in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is not operating (low probability state), the random number per special symbol falls within the range of "0 to 204". In this case, the result of the corresponding judgment is forcibly out of place (replaced by out of big hits), and when the gaming state (high probability state) in which the probability variation function of the special symbol is operating, the special symbol perturbation When the numerical value falls within the range of “0 to 818”, the result of the hit / fail judgment is forcibly deviated (replaced with deviant from the big hit). As a modification, in addition to the above special symbol win / loss lottery table, a table for big hit non-lottery that does not include the judgment value (random number range) of the big hit as a result of the hit / miss judgment of the special symbol, During the variation display of the special symbol big hit, refer to the table dedicated to the big hit non-lottery process, not the above special symbol win / loss lottery table, and carry out the small hit lottery in which the result of the win / loss determination is only a small hit or off A method may be adopted. In this modified example, if the small hit is not set as a result of the hit / miss determination, a method of immediately determining the out-of-match without performing the hit / disallow determination may be adopted.

  The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142 determines the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, based on the result of the winning or failure lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. The special symbol stop symbol determination means 142, as shown in FIG. 7, the first special symbol big hit symbol table and the second special symbol referred to when determining the big hit symbol (big hit type) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It has a special symbol jackpot symbol table. In the present embodiment, "specific jackpot" means a jackpot (probable variation jackpot) that triggers the probability variation function of the special symbol after the jackpot game, and "normal jackpot" means a probability variation after the jackpot game. It means a big hit (non-probable variation big hit) that does not trigger the function.

  FIG. 7A is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol big hit symbol table, for the symbol random number value per special symbol, the symbol group, the big hit type, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 of each round They are associated with each other (in this example, description of stop symbols is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol big hit table, four kinds of big hit types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is divided into 10R specific jackpot (symbol group A), 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C), and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D). In the 10R specific big hit (symbol group A), the number of specified rounds of the big hit game is 10, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group B), 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C) and 4R normal jackpot (symbol group D), the specified number of rounds of jackpot game is 4 rounds, and a big prize in one round game The opening time (maximum opening time) of the mouth 54 is 28 seconds.

  FIG. 7B is a diagram schematically showing the second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol big hit symbol table, for the symbol random number value per special symbol, the symbol group, the big hit type, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 of each round They are associated with each other (in this example, description of stop symbols is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, five jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, 10R specific jackpot (design group E), 6R specific jackpot (design group F), 4R specific jackpot 1 (design group G), 4R specific jackpot 2 (design group H), 2R normal jackpot (Symbol group I). In the 10R specific big hit (symbol group E), the number of specified rounds of the big hit game is 10, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. 6R specific big hit (symbol group F), the prescribed number of rounds of big hit game is 6 rounds, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. 4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G) and 4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H), the prescribed round number of the jackpot game is 4 rounds, the opening time of the big winning opening 54 in one round game (maximum opening time ) Is 28 seconds. In the 2R normal big hit (symbol group I), the number of specified rounds of the big hit game is 2, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is 2 seconds.

  Of the various types of jackpots, each jackpot other than the 2R regular jackpot is an opportunity to execute a long open round game in which the jackpot 54 is opened for a long time (28 seconds) in all round games during the jackpot game. It is a big hit. On the other hand, the 2R normal big hit is a big hit that triggers a short open round game in which the big winning opening 54 is opened for a short time (2 seconds) in all round games during the big hit game. In the present embodiment, a long open round game is a round in which the opening time of the special winning opening 54 is set to allow or easily enter a specified number (full count: 10 balls) of game balls into the special winning opening 54. It is a game. The short open round game is a round game in which the opening time of the special winning opening 54 is set to be impossible or difficult to enter a predetermined number (full count: 10 balls) of game balls in the special winning opening 54.

  Although illustration is omitted, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, one small hit symbol (symbol group) is selected from a plurality of types of small hit symbols (symbol group), and the 2 At the end of the variable display of the special symbol, the selected small hit symbol (symbol group) is to be stopped and displayed. The opening / closing pattern (opening time, number of times of opening) of the special winning opening 54 in the small hitting game may be configured to be different depending on the type of the small hitting pattern.

  Next, a game state in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 8 is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of game states, a normal game state, a time saving game state, a latent probability variation game state, and a probability variation game state are set. As a type of the game state, (1) the probability variation function of the special symbol, the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the game state in which the electric Chu support function operates are referred to as "probability variation state" or "probability variation gaming state", ( 2) The probability variation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated, and the game state in which the electric Chu support function does not operate is called the "latency probability variation game state" or "latency probability variation state", and (3) special The game state in which the variable time shortening function of the special symbol and the electric choo support function operate without the probability change function of the symbol operating is called "time saving state" or "time saving game state", and (4) all functions operate The state not played is called a "normal state" or a "normal game state". Here, it can be said that the "probability variation game state", the "hidden probability variation variation game state" and the "time saving game state" are advantageous game states for the player as compared with the "normal game state". In addition, each gaming state is a combination of the operating state (high probability state / low probability state) of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol and the operating state (high base state / low base state) of the electric Chu support function ((1) ) Probability variation gaming state is "high probability high base state", (2) Latent probability variation gaming state is "high probability low base state", (3) Short time gaming state is "low probability high base state", (4) Normal gaming state Can also be expressed as “low probability low base state”. Here, regarding the variation time reduction function of the special symbol, the variation time of the special symbol which is the subject of the game in at least the game state of the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be shortened. That is, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is operating, in the gaming state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game (normal gaming state), the first special symbol The variation time is shortened, and the variation state of the second special symbol may be shortened in the gaming state in which the variation display of the second special symbol is the main subject of the game (time saving game state, latent probability variation game state, probability variation game state). .

  FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table in this embodiment. In the gaming state setting table, for each jackpot type (type of symbol group), the gaming state to be shifted after the jackpot game is finished is set. In the present embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the game state after the end of the big hit game is (A) big hit type (type of symbol group), and (B) game at the time of big hit winning It is set according to the state. In addition, the number of times each gaming state continues (the number of times the special symbol changes and displays) is the number of probability changes that the probability change function of the special symbol operates (the number of probability changes), and the change time that the change time shortening function of the special symbol operates. It is set based on the number of times of shortening (the number of times of time saving operation) and the number of times of the easy entry state (the number of times of electric power support operation) in which the electric Chu support function operates.

  If you win the "10R special jackpot (symbol group A)", "4R special jackpot 1 (symbol group B)" in the first special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, after the jackpot game is over The latent probability variation game state is set as the game state. When transitioning to the latent probability variation game state after the completion of the big hit game, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time reduction number "100 times", and the easy entry state number "0 times" are set. Therefore, the latent probability change game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes and reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times), the special When the latent probability variation game state ends by reaching the specified ST number (100 times) of the variable display number of symbols, the next special symbol variable display transitions to the normal game state, and the next big hit occurs. When the latent probability variation gaming state ends, the state shifts to the gaming state corresponding to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

  If you win the "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C)" in the first special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, the probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game is over. When shifting to the probability variation game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability variation number “100 times”, the variation time reduction number “100 times”, and the easy entry state number “100 times” are set. Therefore, the probability variation game state continues until the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times), the special symbol When the probability variation game state ends by reaching the specified ST number (100 times) of the variation display count of, the variation will change from the next special symbol variation display to the normal game state, and the next big hit will cause a certainty variation. When the gaming state ends, the state shifts to the gaming state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

  When the "4R normal big hit (symbol group D)" is won in the first special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of big hit winning, the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. When shifting to the time saving game state after the big hit game is finished, the probability variation number “0”, the variation time reduction number “70”, and the easy entry state number “70” are set. Therefore, the time saving game state continues until the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specific number (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number (70 times), the variation of the special symbol. When the time saving game state ends when the number of times of display reaches a specific number (70 times), the time saving game state is changed to the normal game state from the variable display of the next special symbol, and the next big hit occurs, which causes the time saving game state. When ending, shift to the gaming state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the end of the big hit game.

  If you win the "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot (symbol group F)", "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)" in the second special symbol, the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning Depending on, the game state set after the end of the big hit game is different. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal gaming state, the probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the completion of the jackpot game, and the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the time saving gaming state, the probability variation gaming. In the case of the state or the latent probability variation game state, the latent probability variation game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. When transitioning to the probability variation game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the easy entry state number "100 times" are set, and the latent state will be hidden after the end of the big hit game. When shifting to the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time reduction number "100 times", and the easy entry state number "0 times" are set. Therefore, the probability variation game state continues until the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times), the special symbol When the probability variation game state ends by reaching the specified ST number (100 times) of the variation display count of, the variation will change from the next special symbol variation display to the normal game state, and the next big hit will cause a certainty variation. When the gaming state ends, the state shifts to the gaming state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends. Similarly, the latent probability variation game state continues until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times), the special When the latent probability variation game state ends by reaching the specified ST number (100 times) of the variable display number of symbols, the next special symbol variable display transitions to the normal game state, and the next big hit occurs. When the latent probability variation gaming state ends, the state shifts to the gaming state corresponding to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

  When the "4R special jackpot 2 (symbol group H)" is won in the second special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, the probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the termination of the jackpot game. When shifting to the probability variation game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability variation number “100 times”, the variation time reduction number “100 times”, and the easy entry state number “100 times” are set. Therefore, the probability variation game state continues until the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times), the special symbol When the probability variation game state ends by reaching the specified ST number (100 times) of the variation display count of, the variation will change from the next special symbol variation display to the normal game state, and the next big hit will cause a certainty variation. When the gaming state ends, the state shifts to the gaming state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

  When the "2R normal big hit (symbol group I)" is won in the second special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. When shifting to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game is finished, the probability variation number “0”, the variation time reduction number “50”, and the easy entry state number “50” are set. Therefore, the time saving game state continues until the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specific number (50 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number (50 times), the variation of the special symbol. When the time saving game state ends when the number of times of display reaches a specific number (70 times), the time saving game state is changed to the normal game state from the variable display of the next special symbol, and the next big hit occurs, which causes the time saving game state. When ending, shift to the gaming state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the end of the big hit game.

  Here, as described above, the occurrence of a big hit can be a trigger for shifting the gaming state, but the occurrence of a small hit is not a trigger for shifting the gaming state. That is, when the result of the determination of whether or not the special symbol is a small hit, the fluctuation display of the final time that is the ending condition of the game state (for example, the fluctuation display of the 100th rotation of the probability variation gaming state and the latent probability variation gaming state, the time saving game). Except for the 70th rotation variation display), the gaming state at the time of small hit winning is continued as it is, and the transition control of the gaming state is not performed when the small hit is triggered. That is, if the gaming state before the small hit occurrence is the normal gaming state, the gaming state during the small hit game and the gaming state after the small hit game also become the normal gaming state, and if the gaming state before the small hit occurrence is the time saving gaming state, During the small hitting game and after the small hitting game also becomes a time saving game state, and if the gaming state before the small hit occurs is the probability changing gaming state, the gaming state during the small hitting game and after the small hitting game will also be the certain changing gaming state. If the gaming state before the small hit occurs is the latent probability changing game state, the gaming states during the small hit game and after the small hit game also become the latent probability changing game state.

  In the present embodiment, as a game state having a higher degree of advantage for the player than the normal game state, the time saving game state, the latent probability variation game state, and the probability variation game state are also referred to as “advantageous game state”.

  The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination means 143 determines the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol based on the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value. Here, as shown in FIGS. 10 to 14, the special symbol variation pattern determination means 143 holds a plurality of types of variation pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol. The special symbol fluctuation pattern determination means 143 selects any fluctuation pattern table from plural kinds of fluctuation pattern tables based on the current fluctuation pattern selection state. The relationship between the variation pattern selection state and the variation pattern table will be described later. A plurality of types of variation patterns are defined in each variation pattern table. In each figure, "selectivity" is shown for convenience of explanation, but in practice, a judgment value (range of random number values) for determining the variation pattern is set according to the special symbol variation pattern random value. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on which judgment value the fluctuation pattern random value belongs to. As for the various variation patterns, the variation time is set for each variation pattern as the ending condition of the symbol variation, and it is premised that the symbol variation by the decorative symbol composed of a plurality of symbols is also executed in the variation time. Is defined as

  Here, the variation pattern selection state will be described. The variation pattern selection state is one of the selection conditions referred to when selecting a variation pattern (variation pattern table). In this example, a “normal selection state”, a “limited frequency selection state”, a “time saving selection state”, a “latent probability selection state”, and a “probability variation selection state” are set as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states. Normal selection state and limited frequency selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set in the game state (normal game state) in which neither the probability variation function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function, nor the electric choo support function is operating. is there. However, the limited frequency selection state, when the advantageous game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state, latent probability variation game state) is completed and the state is changed to the normal game state, a fixed period immediately after the transition to this normal game state (Period over the number of fluctuation display times (4 times) corresponding to the maximum number (4 pieces) of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol: hereinafter referred to as "limited period") Only in a variation pattern selected state is there. Therefore, during execution of the normal game state, the normal selection state is set except for the limited period (the period during which the special selection state is set). Time saving selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set in the game state (time saving game state) in which the special symbol probability variation function does not operate, but the special symbol variation time shortening function and the electric Chu support function are operating. . The probability variation selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set in the gaming state (probability variation gaming state) in which all of the special symbol probability variation function and variation time shortening function, and the electronic Chu support function are operating. The latent probability selection state is a variation pattern selection state that is set in the gaming state (the latent probability variation gaming state) in which the probability varying function and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated and the electric Chu support function is not activated. In addition, in the present embodiment, the limited period is set as a period over a variable display of four rotations corresponding to the maximum number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol, but is not limited to this configuration. Instead, for example, it may be set as a period over which variable display of 5 rotations or more is performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 to 14, each variation pattern table has different columns to be referred to for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the same special symbol variation pattern random value is acquired. Also, different variation patterns can be selected. Here, the number of operation holding balls described in each figure (“holding 0 pieces”, “holding 1 to 2 pieces”, “holding 3 pieces”) is a variation pattern lottery of the first special symbol, The number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol (the number of operation-holding balls after the holding digestion) means, if it is the variation pattern lottery of the second special symbol, the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (after the holding digestion) It means the number of holding balls). The number of operation-holding balls is the number of operation-holding balls that are present at the time of the variation pattern lottery (at the start of the change display / after the hold exhaustion) (excluding the operation-holding balls exhausted by the change display). . In addition, as the modification, you may use the total value of the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, in the limited frequency state, regardless of the first special symbol, the second special symbol, it is possible to perform the variation pattern lottery using a common table.

  The variation effect of the decorative symbol that is performed in conjunction with the variable display of the special symbol is determined based on the type (variation time) of the variation pattern of the special symbol. For reference, FIGS. 10 to 14 also show the content of the variation effect set corresponding to each variation pattern (variation time). In the figure, "ultra-shortening variation", "shortening variation", and "normal variation" are the effects that the decorative patterns in the three rows fluctuate, and even if the reach state is not reached even once, it becomes "off" in so-called variability. Is. In the following, the ultra-shortening fluctuation, the shortening fluctuation, and the normal fluctuation are collectively referred to as “non-reach loss”. In this non-reach deviation, the variation mode differs from each other in that the variation display is stopped in a shorter time than the normal variation and the ultra-short variation is shorter than the short variation. "N reach (normal reach)" is a state (reach state) in which the same decorative pattern is stopped in two rows (generally the left row and the right row) of the three rows of decorative patterns, and the remaining one row (general) In the middle row), if different decorative symbols are stopped in the middle row, it becomes “out”, and if the same decorative pattern is stopped in the remaining one row (generally in the middle row), it becomes “big hit”. “SP reach” is a reach production that has a relatively high expectation for a big hit compared to the N reach described above. It develops from N reach and displays, for example, still images / videos such as animation and live action. It is a production. The "ultra-long fluctuation" is an effect in which the fluctuation time is set to be extremely long. "Immediate hit" is an effect in which the variation time is set to an extremely short time, and immediately after the start of the variation display, the "big hit" or "small hit" is immediately achieved without going through the reach state.

(Variation pattern table 1)
FIG. 10 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 1. The variation pattern table 1 is a variation pattern table set when the currently selected variation pattern selection state is the normal selection state. The fluctuation pattern table 1 is a different table depending on the result of the hit / no hit judgment (big hit, small hit, miss).

  In the fluctuation pattern table 1 for out-of-range, fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (shortened fluctuation), PH1-2 (normal fluctuation), PH1-3 (N reach), PH1-4 (SP reach), PH1-5 (ultra long). Fluctuation) is set. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is out of alignment, fluctuation patterns PH1-1 (shortening fluctuation), PH1-2 (normal fluctuation), PH1-3 (N reach), PH1-4 (SP reach) 2) is selected. At this time, if the result of the determination result of the first special symbol is out of alignment, the table content of the reference destination is set differently according to the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern Even if the random number values are the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the larger the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set relatively short, and the number of operation retaining balls of the first special symbol is The smaller the number, the easier the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is out of alignment, the variation pattern PH1-5 (ultra-long variation) is selected. In other words, if the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is out of place, the variation pattern of the selection target is fixed without depending on the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol (the second special symbol). Only long-long fluctuations with extremely long fluctuation times are selected).

  In the variation pattern table 1 for the big hit / small hit, the variation patterns PA1-1 (N reach), PA1-2 (SP reach), PA1-3 (ultra long variation), PA1-4 (ultra long variation), PA1. -5 (super long fluctuation), PA1-6 (super long fluctuation), PA1-7 (super long fluctuation) are set. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a particular big hit (10R particular big hit, 4R particular big hit 1, 4R particular big hit), fluctuation pattern PA1-2 (SP reach) Is selected and the type of big hit is the normal big hit (4R normal big hit), the variation pattern PA1-1 (N reach) or PA1-2 (SP reach) is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, it does not depend on the big hit type, fluctuation pattern PA1-3 (ultra long fluctuation), PA1-4 (ultra long fluctuation), PA1-5 (ultra long) Fluctuation), PA1-6 (ultra-long fluctuation), and PA1-7 (ultra-long fluctuation) are selected. In addition, when the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation pattern PA1-3 (ultra-long variation) is selected. That is, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol corresponds to a big hit or a small hit, only the ultra-long variation in which the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be extremely long is selected.

(Variation pattern table 2)
FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 2. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state in which the user is currently staying is the limited frequency selection state. The variation pattern table 2 is a different table depending on the result of the hit / no hit determination (big hit, small hit, miss).

  Variation patterns PH2-1 (shortening variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 (SP reach) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for the outlier. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is out of alignment, the variation pattern PA2-1 (shortening variation), PH2-2 (normal variation), PH2-3 (N reach), PH2-4 (SP reach) 2) is selected. At this time, if the result of the determination result of the first special symbol is out of alignment, the table content of the reference destination is set differently according to the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol, and the special symbol variation pattern Even if the random number values are the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, the larger the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol, the easier it is to select the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set relatively short, and the number of operation retaining balls of the first special symbol is The smaller the number, the easier the variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to be relatively long. The variation pattern table 2 and the variation pattern table 1 described above are set to have the same tendency of selecting the variation time of the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is out, the variation pattern PH2-1 (shortening variation) or PH2-5 (SP reach) does not depend on the number of operation-holding balls of the second special symbol. To be selected. The variation pattern table 2 is set so that the selection tendency of the variation pattern out of the second special symbol is different from that of the variation pattern table 1 described above. That is, the variation pattern table 2 is shorter than the variation pattern table 1 described above in the variation time of the deviation of the second special symbol (a relatively short variation time is easily selected).

  Variation patterns PA2-1 (immediate hit), PA2-2 (N reach), PA2-3 (SP reach) are set in the variation pattern table 2 for big hits / small hits. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a specific big hit (10R particular big hit 1, 4R particular big hit 1, 4R particular big hit 2), fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (SP Reach) is selected, and if the big hit type is a normal big hit (4R normal big hit), the variation pattern PA2-2 (N reach) or PA2-3 (SP reach) is selected. The variation pattern table 2 and the variation pattern table 1 described above have the same tendency of selecting the variation time of the big hit of the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a particular big hit (10R particular big hit, 6R particular big hit, 4R particular big hit 1, 4R particular big hit 2), fluctuation pattern PA2-3 If (SP reach) is selected and the type of big hit is the normal big hit (2R normal big hit), the variation pattern PA2-2 (N reach) or PA2-3 (SP reach) is selected. Further, when the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation pattern PA2-1 (immediate hit) is selected. The variation pattern table 2 is set so that the variation tendency of the variation time of the big hit / small hit of the second special symbol is different from that of the variation pattern table 1 described above. That is, in the variation pattern table 2, variation time of the big hit / small hit of the second special symbol is shortened as compared with the variation pattern table 1 described above (relatively short variation time is easily selected. Exist).

  Here, in the limited period of the normal game state that refers to this variation pattern table 2, compared with the outside of the limited period of the normal game state that the variation pattern table 1 is referred to, the average variation time of the first special symbol The values are set to be the same, and the fluctuation efficiency of the first special symbol is designed to be equal. On the other hand, within the limited period of the normal game state in which this variation pattern table 2 is referred to, compared with the outside of the limited period of the normal game state in which the variation pattern table 1 is referred to, the average value of the variation time of the second special symbol Is set to be short, and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is designed to be high (the number of variations per unit time increases).

(Variation pattern table 3)
FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 3. The fluctuation pattern table 2 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state in which the user is currently staying is the time saving selection state. The variation pattern table 3 is a different table according to the result of the hit / no hit determination (big hit, small hit, miss).

  In the variation pattern table 3 for out-of-range, variation patterns PH3-1 (ultra-shortening variation), PH3-2 (shortening variation), PH3-3 (normal variation), PH3-4 (SP reach) are set. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is out of alignment, the variation pattern PH3-2 (shortening variation), PH3-3 (normal variation) without depending on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol. , PH3-4 (SP reach) is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is out of alignment, fluctuation patterns PH3-1 (super shortening fluctuation), PH3-2 (shortening fluctuation), PH3-3 (normal fluctuation), PH3-4 (SP reach) 2) is selected. At this time, if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is out of place, the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol (specifically, depending on the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the second special symbol), the reference The table contents are set to be different, and even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, than when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists, the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively It is easy to select a variation pattern that is set to short.

  Variation patterns PA3-1 (immediate hit) and PA3-2 (SP reach) are set in the variation pattern table 3 for big / small hits. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA3-2 (SP reach) is selected without depending on the big hit type. Similarly, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA3-2 (SP reach) is selected without depending on the big hit type. On the other hand, if the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation pattern PA3-1 (immediate hit) is selected.

(Variation pattern table 4)
FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 4. The fluctuation pattern table 4 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state in which the user is currently staying is the latent probability selection state. The variation pattern table 4 is a different table depending on the result of the hit / no hit determination (big hit, small hit, miss).

  Variation patterns PH4-1 (ultra-shortening variation) and PH4-2 (SP reach (draw)) are set in the variation pattern table 4 for deviation. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is out of alignment, the variation pattern PH4-1 (ultra-shortening variation) is selected without depending on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is out of place, the variation pattern PH4-1 (super shortening variation), PH4-2 (SP reach ( Draw)) is selected.

  In the variation pattern table 4 for the big hit / small hit, the variation patterns PA4-1 (immediate hit), PA4-2 (SP reach (win)), PA4-3 (SP reach (defeat)), PA4-4 (super). Long fluctuation) is set. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA4-4 (ultra-long variation) is selected without depending on the big hit type. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a particular big hit (10R particular big hit, 6R particular big hit, 4R particular big hit 1, 4R particular big hit 2), fluctuation pattern PA4-2 If (SP reach (win)) is selected and the type of big hit is the normal big hit (2R normal big hit), the variation pattern PA4-3 (SP reach (defeat)) is selected. In addition, when the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation pattern PA4-1 (immediate hit) is selected.

  Here, as the effect contents of the variable effect described in the figure, in “SP reach (win)”, “SP reach (defeat)”, and “SP reach (draw)”, the ally character is the enemy character. It is a battle reach where a battle production that decides the victory by losing the battle is developed. That is, in the latent probability variation game state in which the variation pattern table 4 is referred to, the battle mode is adopted as the effect mode (a small hit RUSH mode described later). "SP reach (win)" means that the big hit is confirmed in the variation display by the ally character winning the enemy character, and the big hit type is a specific big hit (the big hit probability is high after the big hit game ends). Re-entry into the game state set to (1) is suggested or notified. "SP reach (defeat)" means that the big hit is confirmed in the variation display when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, and the big hit type is a normal big hit (the big hit probability is low after the big hit game ends. It is a battle effect that suggests or informs that the player will fall into the game state set to. The “SP reach” is a battle effect in which the teammate character draws with the enemy character, which suggests or informs that the deviation has been confirmed in the variable display. Therefore, "SP reach (win)" and "SP reach (defeat)" suggest the end of the latent probability variation gaming state by suggesting or informing that the jackpot is confirmed in the variation display, and suggestion of ending the latent latency variation gaming state. (“Late probability mode end suggestion effect” to be described later), and “SP reach (draw)” means that the deviation is confirmed in the variation display, so that the latent probability variation game state continues after the next variation display. It is a continuation suggestion effect of the latent probability change game state to be suggested or notified (“latency probability continuation suggestion effect” described later). Here, "end of the latent probability variation game state" includes that the latent probability variation game state ends once. In other words, if you win in the battle production, the big hit game is started, so the big hit game state (normal game state / low probability low base state) is set once, but after the big hit game ends, it is hidden again. Since the probability variation game state will be entered (excluding "4R specific jackpot 2"), it can be said that the latent probability mode end suggestion production suggests or informs that the latent probability variation game state will end "once". . If you win a big jackpot (a big jackpot that triggers the transition to a latent probability variation game state) other than 4R specific jackpot 2 among multiple types of specific jackpots, after winning the battle production, move to any game state In the production that informs you whether or not you will transition to the latent probability variation gaming state, if you win 4R specific jackpot 2 (big jackpot that triggers transition to the probability variation gaming state), after winning in the battle production, It is configured to notify that the game state is to be changed to the certainty variation game state, by the effect of notifying which game state to shift to.

(Variation pattern table 5)
FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram showing the variation pattern table 5. The fluctuation pattern table 5 is a fluctuation pattern table set when the fluctuation pattern selection state in which the user is currently staying is the probability change selection state. The variation pattern table 5 is a different table depending on the result of the win / no decision (big hit, small hit, miss).

  Variation patterns PH5-1 (ultra-shortening variation), PH5-2 (shortening variation), PH5-3 (normal variation), and PH5-4 (SP reach) are set in the variation pattern table 5 for deviation. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is out of alignment, the variation pattern PH5-2 (shortening variation), PH5-3 (normal variation) without depending on the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol. , PH5-4 (SP reach) is selected. On the other hand, if the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is out, fluctuation pattern PH5-1 (super shortening fluctuation), PH5-2 (shortening fluctuation), PH5-3 (normal fluctuation), PH5-4 (SP reach) 2) is selected. At this time, if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is out of place, the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol (specifically, depending on the presence or absence of the operation holding ball of the second special symbol), the reference The table contents are set to be different, and even if the special symbol fluctuation pattern random value is the same, different fluctuation patterns can be selected. Specifically, than when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol does not exist, when the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists, the variation time of the second special symbol is relatively It is easy to select a variation pattern that is set to short.

  In the variation pattern table 5 for the big hit / small hit, the variation patterns PA5-1 (immediate hit), PA5-2 (immediate hit), PA5-3 (SP reach (win)), PA5-4 (SP reach (defeat) )) Is set. Here, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the variation pattern PA5-2 (immediate hit) is selected without depending on the big hit type. On the other hand, if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a particular big hit (10R particular big hit, 6R particular big hit, 4R particular big hit 1, 4R particular big hit 2), fluctuation pattern PA5-3 If (SP reach (win)) is selected and the type of big hit is the normal big hit (2R normal big hit), the variation pattern PA5-4 (SP reach (defeat)) is selected. If the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the variation pattern PA5-1 (immediate hit) is selected.

  Here, as the effect contents of the variable effect described in the figure, in “SP reach (win)”, “SP reach (defeat)”, and “SP reach (draw)”, the ally character is the enemy character. It is a battle reach where a battle production that decides the victory by losing the battle is developed. That is, in the probability variation game state in which the variation pattern table 5 is referred to, the battle mode is adopted as the effect mode (probability variation mode described later). "SP reach (win)" means that the big hit is confirmed in the variation display by the ally character winning the enemy character, and the big hit type is a specific big hit (the big hit probability is high after the big hit game ends). Re-entry into the game state set to (1) is suggested or notified. "SP reach (defeat)" means that the big hit is confirmed in the variation display when the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, and the big hit type is a normal big hit (the big hit probability is low after the big hit game ends. It is a battle effect that suggests or informs that the player will fall into the game state set to. The “SP reach” is a battle effect in which the teammate character draws with the enemy character, which suggests or informs that the deviation has been confirmed in the variable display. Here, if you win a jackpot (a jackpot that triggers the transition to the latent probability variation game state) other than the 4R jackpot 2 among a plurality of types of jackpots, after winning in the battle production, which game state In the production that informs you whether to move, informing you that it will transition to the latent probability variation gaming state, and if you win 4R specific jackpot 2 (big jackpot that triggers transition to the probability variation gaming state), after winning in battle production , It is adapted to inform that the game state is to be shifted to the probability variation game state by an effect of notifying which game state to shift to. In addition, SP reach (see FIG. 13 and FIG. 14) executed when the gaming state is a latent probability variation gaming state or a probability variation gaming state, and is executed when the gaming state is a normal gaming state or a time saving gaming state. The SP reach (see FIGS. 10 to 12) is an SP reach having different effect contents. In other words, the SP reach executed when the gaming state is the normal gaming state or the time saving gaming state is the effect content that merely suggests or informs that the jackpot expectation is relatively high, while the gaming state is latent. The probability variation game state or the SP reach executed when in the probability variation game state has effect contents that suggest or notify the presence or absence of the big hit and the big hit type according to the effect result.

  Thus, in the fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 5, the fluctuation time of the special symbol is defined for each fluctuation pattern, but no matter which fluctuation pattern is selected, the fixed stop time of the special symbol (confirmed display time ) Is set to “0.5 seconds”. The fixed stop time of the special symbol (confirmed display time) is the time when the special symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is held). In addition, the variation time and the fixed stop time of the decorative symbol are also set in correspondence with the variation time and the fixed stop time of such a special symbol. As a modified example of the fluctuation pattern tables 1 to 5 (FIGS. 10 to 14), in the above embodiment, even if the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol is 0, ultra-shortening fluctuation or shortening fluctuation can be selected. Although it is configured as described above, when the number of operation holding balls of the special symbol is 0, it may be configured so that the ultra-shortening variation or the shortening variation is not selected. Further, as a modification of the variation pattern table 1 (FIG. 10), in the above embodiment, the variation time value when the big hit of the second special symbol is plural, and the variation time value when the small hit of the second special symbol is 1 Although there is only one, the fluctuation time value at the time of big hit of the second special symbol may be one, and there may be a plurality of fluctuation time values at the time of small hit of the second special symbol, and at the time of big hit of the second special symbol. There may be a plurality of fluctuation time values and a fluctuation time value at the time of a small hit. Further, as a modification of the fluctuation pattern tables 3 to 5 (FIGS. 12 to 14), in the embodiment, the fluctuation patterns at the time of a big hit of the first special symbol in the fluctuation pattern tables 3 to 5 (variation time value, effect) The contents) are different, but the variation pattern at the time of a big hit of the first special symbol in the variation pattern tables 3 to 5 is always an immediate hit (a sudden hit after the variation effect of the second special symbol is stopped). It may be a variation pattern for 2 seconds without effect (it may be configured with a common variation pattern (variation time value, effect content)). Moreover, the variation pattern (variation time value, effect content) and selection rate at the time of a big hit of the first special symbol in the variation pattern table 3 (FIG. 12) are the first in the variation pattern tables 4 to 5 (FIGS. 13 to 14). It may be applied to the variation pattern (variation time value, effect contents) and selection rate when the special symbol is a big hit. Further, the variation pattern (variation time value, effect content) and selection rate at the time of a big hit of the first special symbol in the variation pattern table 4 (FIG. 13) are the first in the variation pattern tables 3 and 5 (FIGS. 12 and 14). It may be applied to the variation pattern (variation time value, effect contents) and selection rate when the special symbol is a big hit. Also, the variation pattern (variation time value, effect content) and selection rate at the time of a big hit of the first special symbol in the variation pattern table 5 (FIG. 14) are the first in variation pattern tables 3 to 4 (FIGS. 12 to 13). It may be applied to the variation pattern (variation time value, effect contents) and selection rate when the special symbol is a big hit. In addition, the effect contents at the time of a big hit of the first special symbol in the variation pattern table 3 (FIG. 12) may be no effect. In that case, after a variation display of 30 seconds, an effect of sudden big hit (a sudden hit) That is, if the current variation display of the second special symbol is currently being performed, the effect relating to the variable display of the second special symbol may be stopped suddenly). Further, regarding the variation pattern table 3 (FIG. 12) and the variation pattern table 5 (FIG. 14), the variation pattern (variation time) at the time of the small hit of the second special symbol is one variation pattern (one variation time). However, a plurality of them may be provided. Further, in the time-shortening gaming state and the probability variation gaming state in which these fluctuation pattern tables 3 and 5 are referred to, even if the small hit variation display is executed, the game ball is put into the special winning opening 54 in the small hit game. Since it is difficult to do so, it does not inform you that you have won the small hit or that you are in the small hit game, but it looks like a fluctuation display as a production, so it is small in the time saving game state and the probability variation game state. As for the hit variation display, the variation time value may be changed in accordance with the number of operation holding balls as in the case of the off variation display. For example, when the number of operation holding balls is 0, “9 seconds”, the operation is performed. It may be "4 seconds" when the number of holding balls is 1 or 2, and "0.5 seconds" when the number of operation holding balls is 3. By approximating the total time of the fluctuation time value and the execution time of the small hitting game to the fluctuation time value of the deviation fluctuation display, it is desirable to perform the effect as if the deviation fluctuation display is performed once.

  Further, the special symbol fluctuation pattern determination means 143, after selecting the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, instructs the effect control board 200 to start changing the decorative symbol, so that communication with the effect control board 200 is normally performed. Production control command (communication inspection command) for confirming whether or not it is present, production control command (variation additional information designation command) including variation additional information (information for adding and subtracting variation time), production including variation pattern information Control command (variation pattern designation command), production control command (symbol designation command) including information of character effect number (symbol group and game state), etc. are generated (hereinafter, these commands are collectively referred to as "fluctuation start command"). This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The normal symbol lottery processing means 145 has a normal symbol winning / discarding determining means 146, a normal symbol stop symbol determining means 147, and a normal symbol variation pattern determining means 148. Normal symbol lottery processing means 145, when the variation start condition of the normal symbol is satisfied, the random number per normal symbol stored in the first storage area in the normal symbol holding storage area, the normal symbol variation pattern random value is read, The main symbol storage area 180 stores the normal symbol validity determination area and the normal symbol variation pattern determination area, respectively. Here, FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram for explaining the normal symbol lottery. In the drawing, (A) shows a normal symbol winning / discarding lottery table, (B) shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) shows a normal electric accessory release pattern table. Here, "variation start condition of the normal symbol" is (a) that the normal symbol is waiting for variation, (a) that there is an operation reserve ball of the normal symbol. When all these conditions are satisfied, it is determined that the normal symbol is in a state in which variation can be started (state in which the variation start condition is satisfied).

  The normal symbol hit determination unit 146 reads a random number per normal symbol from the normal symbol hit determination region of the main information storage unit 180 and executes the hit determination, and the determination result is a hit or a hit. decide. The result of this winning / disapproval determination is temporarily stored in the normal symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180, is used in the subsequent processing, and is cleared when the variation of the normal symbol is stopped. As shown in FIG. 15 (A), the normal symbol hit determination unit 146 holds the normal symbol hit / miss lottery table that is referred to when the hit determination of the normal symbol is made. The normal symbol hit probability is set to "1 / 1.02" when the electric Chu support function (ordinary symbol probability variation function) is not operating, and the electric Chu support function (ordinary symbol probability variation function) is set. If it is working, it is set to "1 / 1.01". Therefore, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is a low base state or a high base state, the win is derived with a very high probability in the hit determination of the normal symbol.

  Normal symbol stop symbol determination means 147 refers to a normal symbol stop symbol table (not shown), if the result of the normal symbol hit determination is a hit, a predetermined hit symbol (ordinary electric accessory 522 trigger On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol is out, a predetermined out symbol (outward symbol that does not trigger the normal electric accessory 522 to operate) is assigned. In the present embodiment, as the hit symbol of the ordinary symbol that triggers the operation of the ordinary electric accessory 522, for example, there are three types of symbols (combination of symbols) such as the ordinary symbol A, the ordinary symbol B, and the ordinary symbol C. .

  Normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148, while reading the normal symbol variation pattern random value from the ordinary symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage means 180, referring to the ordinary symbol variation pattern table, the variation pattern of the ordinary symbol (variation time ) Is determined. Normal symbol variation pattern determination means 148, as shown in FIG. 15 (B), holds a normal symbol variation pattern table that is referred to when determining the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol. The variation time of the normal symbol is set to "0.5 seconds" when the electric Chu support function (variation time shortening function of the ordinary symbol) is not operating, and the electric Chu support function (variation time shortening function of the ordinary symbol) If is operating, it is set to "0.2 seconds". That is, in the present embodiment, regardless of whether the game state is the low base state or the high base state, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to an extremely short time. It should be noted that, regardless of which variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds". In addition, the fixed stop time (fixed display time) of the normal symbol is the time when the normal symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is held).

  In addition, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 determines the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric auditors product 522 in accordance with the result of the judgment on whether or not the normal symbol is right or wrong. As shown in FIG. 15C, the normal symbol lottery processing means 145 holds a normal electric auditors product opening pattern table that is referred to when determining the opening pattern (opening time) of the normal electric auditors product 522. . The opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is "1 second open → 2 second close → 1 second open → 2 second close → 1 second open when the electric Chu support function (open extension function) is not operating. It is set to "open", and is set to "5.9 seconds open" when the electronic Chu support function (open extension function) is operating. That is, as the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory, the total opening time is "3 seconds" because the opening operation of 1 second is performed three times in the low base state, and the opening time is 5.9 seconds in the high base state. Since the operation is performed only once, the total opening time is "5.9 seconds".

  When the result of the hit determination is a big hit, the special game control means 150, according to the determined big hit type (symbol groups A to I), the execution time (demo time) of the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo, The execution time (round time) of the round game is determined. Then, the special game control means 150 instructs the effect control board 200 side to execute a big hit start demo effect (referred to as "big hit start demo command") and a big hit end demo effect. An effect control command (referred to as "big hit end demo command") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. The big hit start demo command is also an opportunity for determining the contents of a series of big hit mid-range effects (big hit start demonstration effect, round effect, big hit end demonstration effect) that are developed during the big hit game on the effect control board 200 side. Become. Further, the special game control means 150 generates an effect control command (referred to as a "round effect designation command") for instructing the start of a round effect corresponding to each round game in each round game during the big hit game. This is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. The round effect designation command includes information on the current number of rounds, information on opening and closing of the special winning opening 54, and the like. Regarding the execution time of the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo (demonstration time), not only the big hit type (symbol group A to I) but also the same big hit type (symbol group A according to the gaming state at the time of big hit winning) Even if it is ~ I), the execution time (demo time) of the big hit start demo and the big hit end demo may be different.

  In addition, the special game control means 150 determines the execution time (demo time) of the small hit start demo and the small hit end demo when the result of the hit / miss determination is a small hit. Further, the special game control means 150, an effect control command for instructing execution of a small hit start demonstration effect (“small hit start demo command”) and an effect control command for instructing execution of a small hit end demonstration effect (“small hit”). The end demo command ") is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The symbol display control means 155 includes a special symbol display control means 156 and a normal symbol display control means 157. The special symbol display control means 156 variably displays the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 71 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the first special symbol, and after the variation display, the first special symbol is fixedly displayed. Let In addition, the special symbol display control means 156 variably displays the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 72 according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the second special symbol, and after the variation display, the second special symbol. Confirm display. Special symbol display control means 156 has a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) relating to the display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The operating states of the first special symbol display device 71 and the second special symbol display device 72 are monitored based on the special symbol game status of the main information storage means 180. Special symbol display control means 156, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped (that is, at the timing when the value of the special symbol game timer is “0”), the effect control board 200 is requested to confirm the decorative symbol. A production control command (referred to as a "fluctuation stop command") is generated. The normal symbol display control means 157 displays the normal symbol on the normal symbol display device 75 in a variable manner according to the variation pattern (variation time) of the normal symbol, and after the variable display, the normal symbol is fixedly displayed. Normal symbol display control means 157 has a normal symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) relating to the display of the normal symbol. The operating state of the normal symbol display device 75 is monitored based on the normal symbol game status of the main information storage means 180.

<Simultaneous fluctuation processing>
Here, the simultaneous variation process (variation interruption process, variation forced stop process) of the first special symbol and the second special symbol will be described. FIG. 16 is a schematic diagram for explaining the simultaneous variation processing (variation interruption processing, variation forced stop processing) in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, as described above, the determination of the variation start condition of the first special symbol and the determination of the variation start condition of the second special symbol are separately and independently executed, whereby the first special symbol display device 71 The specification (various so-called parallel machine) is adopted in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 72 are simultaneously executed in parallel. That is, by separately and independently digesting the operation holding ball of the first special symbol and the operation holding ball of the second special symbol, for the first special symbol and the second special symbol, corresponding winning / absence lottery and variable display It is configured to perform the above in parallel. Therefore, even if the variation display of one special symbol is performed for a long time among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of the other special symbol is performed in parallel with the variation display of this one special symbol. Therefore, while the variable display of one special symbol is being executed, the variable display of the other special symbol is not delayed. In the following, with regard to the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the variable display of the big hit is referred to as "big hit variable display", and the variable display of the small hit is referred to as "small hit variable display", which is off. The variable display of is referred to as "out-of-range variable display".

≪Variation interruption processing≫
Here, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of one special symbol is the big hit variation display, the small hit variation display or the off variation display, and the variation display of the other special symbol is the small hit variation display. If, in the situation where the variable display of one special symbol and the small hit variation display of the other special symbol are being executed in parallel, before the variable display of one special symbol ends, the other When the small hit variation display of the special symbol ends, from the time when the small hit variation display of the other special symbol ends until the small hit game ends, the variation display of one special symbol is suspended ( Measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display of one special symbol is interrupted). The suspension of the variable display is used to mean that the variable display is temporarily stopped (meaning that it will be resumed later). Then, when the small hit game of the other special symbol ends, the measurement of the variation time related to the variation display of the one special symbol is restarted, and the measurement time of the variation time before the restart and the measurement time of the variation time after the restart When the total time of reaches the preset specified variation time (variation time according to the design value), the variation display of one special symbol will be terminated.

<< Fluctuation forced stop processing >>
On the other hand, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the variation display of one special symbol is a big hit variation display, and the variation display of the other special symbol is a small hit variation display or outlying variation display, one In the situation where the big hit variation display of the special symbol and the small hit variation display or the deviating variation display of the other special symbol are being executed in parallel, the small hit variation display or the deviating variation display of the other special symbol ends. Before, when the big hit variation display of one special symbol is finished, the measurement time of the small hit variation display or the outlying variation display of the other special symbol is the preset variation time (variation time as designed) Even before reaching, when the big hit variation display of one special symbol ends, it is interlocked with or synchronized with it, and the small hit variation display or outlying variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly terminated. That. In addition, in the case of forcibly ending the small hit variation display of the other special symbol, the symbol (fixed display symbol) that is stopped and displayed at the end of the small hit variation display is replaced with a symbol deviating from the small hit symbol. . That is, the small hit variation display of the other special symbol is forcibly displayed as a deviation variation display (as a result, the small hit game is canceled). Thereby, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the special game in one special symbol (big hit game) and the special game in the other special symbol (small hit game) compete with each other. In addition, if the variation display of one special symbol starts as a big hit variation display among the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts varying after that is other than the big hit variation display. Change display (i.e., change display is out-of-range or small-range change display, and if the result is a random number corresponding to a big hit in the win / loss judgment process, the win / fail judgment result is forcibly replaced with off-shift and displayed as off-shift change). Is desirable. In addition, when the variation display of one special symbol starts as a big hit variation display, the variation display of the other special symbol that starts to change after that is a deviation variation display (the big hit or the small hit corresponding to the big hit or small hit in the hit determination process) In the case of a random number, the success / failure determination result is forcibly replaced with “off”, and the out variation display may be displayed.

  As a variation of the variation forced stop process, at the end of the big hit variation display of one special symbol, instead of forcibly ending the small hit variation display or outlying variation display of the other special symbol, one special symbol From the time when the big hit variation display of the symbol ends until the big hit game ends, the small hit variation display or the off variation display of the other special symbol is interrupted (measurement of the variation time related to the variation display of the other special symbol It may be configured to interrupt). Then, when the big hit game of one special symbol is finished, the small hit variation display or the outlying variation display of the other special symbol is restarted, and the measurement time of the variation time before the restart and the measurement time of the variation time after the restart When the total time of and reaches a preset specified variation time (variation time according to the design value), the small hit variation display or the out-of-range variation display of the other special symbol may be configured to end. Good.

  When the result of the special symbol winning / winning lottery is a big hit, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 543 as a big hit game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed, and the special electric prize The object 542 is opened according to a predetermined operation pattern. In the big hit game, one opening / closing operation of the special electric auditors product 542 is regarded as one round game (unit game), and the round game is continuously executed for a specified number of rounds. The electric accessory control unit 160 holds a special winning opening opening counter for storing the number of operations of the special electric accessory 542 (that is, the number of rounds being executed). Here, the operation end condition of the special electric auditors product 542 in the big hit game (the end condition of the unit game) means that a specified count number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls has entered the special winning opening 54. Or, the opening time of the special winning opening 54 has reached the opening limit time (“28 seconds”, “2 seconds” in the present embodiment).

  Further, the electric accessory control means 160 outputs a control signal to the special electric accessory solenoid 543 as a small hit game process after the special symbol is confirmed and displayed when the result of the special symbol winning / winning lottery is a small hit. , The special electric accessory 542 is opened for a short time (1.8 seconds). The small hit game is distinguished from the big hit game composed of a plurality of round games in that it is composed of one round game. Here, the closing condition of the special winning opening 54 in the small hitting game (end condition of the small hitting game) means that a predetermined count number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls enter the big winning opening 54. That is, or the opening time of the special winning opening 54 reaches the opening limit time (“1.8 seconds” in this embodiment).

  In addition, when the result of the hit determination of the normal symbol corresponds to the hit, the electric accessory control unit 160 outputs a control signal to the normal electric accessory solenoid 523, and the normal electric accessory 522 (first time) for a predetermined opening time. 2 Open the starting port 52). Here, as described above, the electric accessory control unit 160 sets the normal electric accessory 522 to 1 second × 3 times (total opening time) in the low base state in which the electric tuner support function (open extension function) is not operating. In the high base state where the electric Chu support function (opening extension function) is operating, the ordinary electric accessory 522 is 5.9 seconds × 1 time (total opening time 5.9). (Seconds) only. Here, the operation termination condition of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is that a predetermined number (“10” in this embodiment) of game balls have entered the second starting opening 52, or the second starting opening 52 This means that the total opening time has reached the opening limit time (“3 seconds”, “5.9 seconds” in this embodiment).

  When the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, the game state control means 165 refers to the above-mentioned game state setting table, and the type of the symbol related to the big hit and the big hit time Based on the game state of, the game state after the end of the big hit game is determined, and the game state after the end of the big hit game is switched. In the present embodiment, as described above, as a plurality of types of game states, a normal game state (low probability low base state), a time saving game state (low probability low base state), a latent latency variation game state (high probability low base state) , The probability variation game state (high probability high base state) is set, and by referring to the above-mentioned game state setting table, any one of a plurality of types of effect modes is set alternatively. Since the game state setting table has already been described, the duplicated description will be omitted here. Further, as described above, the occurrence of a big hit can be a trigger for shifting the gaming state (although the control for shifting the gaming state can be executed due to the winning of the big hit), but the occurrence of a small hit is not the trigger for shifting the gaming state. (The game state transition control due to the small hit winning is not performed).

  When the special game (big hit game, small hit game) is executed, the game state control means 165 determines the variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game based on the symbol type of the big hit or the small hit, and Switch the variation pattern selection state after the end of the special game. In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of variation pattern selection states, a normal selection state, a limited frequency selection state, a time saving selection state, and a probability variation selection state are set, and a plurality of types of variation are set according to the determined game state. Any one of the pattern selection states is set alternatively. It should be noted that the variation pattern selection state has already been described, and therefore, redundant description will be omitted here.

  The game state control means 165 generates an effect control command (referred to as a “game state designation command”) including the current game state information and variation pattern selection state information, and stores this in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. Store.

  The error monitoring control means 170 monitors the input information of the I / O port circuit 104 and inspects a magnetic detection signal from a magnetic sensor, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormal signal, a radio detection signal from a radio sensor, a door / frame opening signal, and the like. , It is determined whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, an effect control command (“error effect designation command”) including the error information is requested to instruct the effect control board 200 of the error state effect. Although not shown in FIG. 4 and the like, the door open switch is a detection means for detecting whether the glass frame 5 is open, and the frame open switch detects whether the front frame 2 is open. The back set release switch is a means for detecting whether or not the back set board 30 is opened. Further, the magnetic sensor and the radio wave sensor are detection means for detecting a so-called illegal game action.

  The main information storage means 180 is random number information obtained in the special symbol game and the normal symbol game, the operation holding ball information of the special symbol and the normal symbol, the game state related to the special symbol game and the normal symbol game (probable change state, time saving state, Information about easy entry), information about fluctuation pattern selection status, result information of winning / discarding lottery (big hit, small hit, out), information on stop symbols and fluctuation patterns related to special symbols and normal symbols, information on special games (round) Number, opening time, opening mode (opening number per round game), status information indicating the operating state of the special symbol display devices 71, 72, status information indicating the operating state of the special electric auditors product 542, production control command It is configured to temporarily store data information and the like, and has a predetermined storage area for storing each information.

  The command transmission / reception unit 190 is configured to transmit various effect control command data stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 to the effect control board 200 by a parallel transmission method when a command transmission request is made. Has been done. Each effect control command has a 2-byte structure including 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data. To distinguish MODE from EVENT, Bit 7 of MODE data is “1”, Bit7 of the EVENT data is set to "0". When these pieces of information are transmitted as valid information, a strobe signal is output at each transmission timing of MODE and EVENT. As a general rule, the effect control command generated in each process is transmitted one command for each interrupt cycle according to the order set in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180.

  The production control board 200, as shown in FIG. 4, the production lottery random number generation means 210, the production generalization means 220, the lamp control means 230, the accessory control means 240, the error production control means 250, the sub-main information storage means 260, the command. The transmitting / receiving means 270 is included. Each of the above-mentioned means in the effect control board 200 is configured by a sub-main CPU 201 arranged on the effect control board 200, a ROM 202, a RAM 203, hardware such as an electronic circuit, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 202. It is a functional representation of something.

  The effect lottery random number generation means 210 is provided with a random number counter for generating various software random numbers (effect lottery random numbers) by the program processing of the sub-main CPU 201. These random number counters play a role as random number generating means for generating random numbers by software. As this software random number, the prefetch lottery random number used in the lottery of the prefetch effect, the decorative pattern random number used in the lottery of the stop symbol of the decorative pattern, the variable effect pattern random number used in the lottery of the variable effect pattern of the decorative pattern, the notice effect It includes a notice lottery random number used for lottery, a big hit production pattern random number used for lottery of big hit production pattern, a stage lottery random number used for lottery of transition of production stage, and the like. As the update timing of these random numbers, update is performed using the remaining time when command analysis is not performed in the production control side main processing described later (when the production control command is not received from the main control board 100). To do.

  The production generalizing means 220 includes the production mode control means 221, the holding information display control means 222, the prefetching announcement control means 223, the variation production control means 224, the decorative symbol control means 225, the announcement production control means 226, and the special game production control means 227. Including.

  Based on the game state designation command from the main control board 100, the production mode control means 221 is in conformity with the game state and the variation pattern selection state managed on the main control board 100 side, and the production mode ("game (Also referred to as a "drafting mode"). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8, a normal mode, a time saving mode, a latent probability mode, and a probability variation mode are set as a plurality of types of effect modes, and a game state (or a game state managed on the main control board 100 side (or Any one of a plurality of types of effect modes is selectively set according to (variation pattern selection state) or the like, and a variable effect according to the set effect mode is executed.

  Basically, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the "normal mode" is set, when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state, the "time saving mode" is set, and the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state. When the "latent probability mode" is set, when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state, the "probability variation mode" is set. However, when transitioning to the normal state based on the end of the non-normal game state (time saving game state, latent hidden variation game state, probability variation game state), fluctuation of the limited period immediately after the game state transitions to the normal game state In the display, the special effect mode is set, and when the variable display for the limited period is finished, the normal effect mode is set. The limited number of times is “4 times” as the variable display number of special symbols. This means that the total variable display count of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is "4 times". That is, when the limited period is reached, it means that the total number of the variable display times of the first special symbol and the variable display number of the second special symbol has reached “4 times”. As a modification thereof, only the variable display number of the first special symbol reaches the upper limit number (4 times), or only the variable display number of the second special symbol reaches the upper limit number (4 times). As a trigger, the special mode may be ended (it may be shifted to the normal mode). Then, when one of the effect modes is set, a background image dedicated to the effect mode (a rear display of the decorative pattern is displayed on the screen as an effect (variable effect) that suggests that the user is staying in the effect mode. (Background image) is displayed, and BGM dedicated to the effect mode is output from the speaker 11. In this way, the background image and BGM are set to be different for each effect mode, so that the player can recognize from the type of background image or BGM which effect mode the player is currently staying in. ing.

  Hold information display control means 222, a first holding ball number counter for counting the operation holding ball number of the first special symbol, a second holding ball number counter for counting the operation holding ball number of the second special symbol Have When the hold information display control means 222 receives the symbol storage number command from the main control board 100, it updates (adds) the value of the corresponding counter based on the information of the number of operation hold balls included in this command. On the other hand, when the hold information display control means 222 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 100, that is, when the operation hold ball is exhausted, it updates (subtracts) the value of the corresponding counter. Further, the hold information display control means 222, on the hold image display unit 710 of the effect display device 70, based on the values of the first hold ball number counter and the second hold ball number counter, the operation hold ball number of the first special symbol. Control is performed to display a number of holding images corresponding to, and a number of holding images corresponding to the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol. Further, the hold information display control means 222 is switched to the hold image corresponding to the operation hold ball by the action hold ball (first operation hold ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being digested. Control is performed to display the changing image that is displayed. In the present embodiment, unless explicitly stated, the reserved image of the first special symbol and the reserved image of the second special symbol are simply referred to as "reserved image", and the changing image of the first special symbol is used. There may be a case where it is simply referred to as "changing image" without distinguishing from the changing image of the second special symbol.

  The pre-reading notice control unit 223 executes a pre-reading determination (referred to as "pre-reading lottery") for the operation-reserving ball that is the target of the pre-reading notice production. The pre-reading notice production is a so-called continuous notice production that pre-announces the possibility of a big hit or high-expectation production (for example, reach production) over one or more variable displays before the pre-reading operation-holding ball is exhausted. It is generated as one aspect. At this time, the pre-reading lottery is performed based on the information of the preliminary determination result included in the preliminary determination command from the main control board 100. Here, when the pre-reading notice control means 223 receives the pre-judgment command from the main control board 100, the pre-judgment result information of the first special symbol and the pre-judgment result information of the second special symbol are distinguished, respectively. A predetermined upper limit number (four) is temporarily stored in the look-ahead information storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 in a form combined with the entering order of the operation-reserving balls. This read-ahead information storage area has the same configuration as the reserved storage area of the main control board 100. A reserve 2 storage area (second reserve storage area), a reserve 3 storage area (third reserve storage area), and a reserve 4 storage area (fourth reserve storage area) are respectively provided. Each of the holding storage areas can store the information of the success / failure preliminary determination result, the information of the symbol preliminary determination result, and the information of the variation pattern preliminary determination result as a set. The information of the preliminary determination result is stored in the order of the hold 1 storage area, the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area, while the hold 1 storage area, the hold 2 storage area, the hold 3 storage area, and the hold 4 storage area. Digested in order of storage area (first-in first-out principle). Further, when the information of the preliminary determination result of the holding 1 storage area is consumed, the information of the preliminary determination result stored in the holding 2 storage area, the holding 3 storage area, and the holding 4 storage area is respectively stored in the storage areas of lower numbers. While shifting, the contents of the reserved 4 storage area are cleared to zero.

  Although not shown, the pending image display area 710 of the effect display device 70 is allocated with a pending image display area for displaying the pending image and a changing image display area for displaying the changing image. . In the reserved image display area, the corresponding reserved image is displayed when the special design actuation holding ball is generated, while the corresponding pending image disappears when the special design actuation holding ball is consumed (during change). Switch to the image). Suspended images are displayed in order according to the order in which the operation-reserved spheres of special symbols are generated (the order in which they enter), and the maximum of four reserved images corresponding to the operation-reserved spheres of the first special symbol, the operation suspension of the second special symbol Up to four reserved images corresponding to the sphere can be displayed. Further, when the earliest hold image displayed in the hold image display area is consumed, this hold image is moved to the changing image display area and displayed as a changing image corresponding to the changing display (the changing image). Displayed from start to stop). Specifically, each time a special symbol operation holding ball is generated, a holding image (holding image of holding 1, holding 2, holding 3 ...) is additionally displayed one by one, and the special holding operation ball is also displayed. Each time the is consumed, the changing image displayed in the changing image display area disappears, and the held images displayed in the holding image display area (holding images of hold 1, hold 2, hold 3 ...) The images are moved one by one toward the changing image display area side, and the first reserved image is switched to the changing image and displayed in the changing image display area. Here, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol is the main subject of the game in the normal game state, and the second special symbol is the main subject of the game in the time saving game state, the latent probability variation game state and the probability variation game state, As the hold display, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not necessarily displayed up to a maximum of eight reserved images, but in each gaming state a maximum of four special symbols are reserved images that are the main subject of the game. It may be displayed. However, as a modification thereof, in addition to the reserved image, a display indicating the number of operation-reserving balls (for example, a number display such as "0" or "4", the operation-retaining balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, respectively) It is also possible to provide one for displaying both the numbers of the above), and this number display may be always displayed regardless of the game state unlike the hold image.

  The variation effect control unit 224, based on the information (variation pattern information, variation additional information, etc.) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100, the variation process from the variation start to the stop in the variation display of the decorative pattern (production process). ) Is defined by lottery. The variation effect control means 224 holds a plurality of types of variation effect pattern tables that are referred to when selecting a variation effect pattern, and a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol from these multiple types of variation effect pattern tables. ) Corresponding to the variable effect pattern table is selected. Here, on the main control board 100 side, the main variation pattern of the special symbol (for example, "SP reach A" or "SP reach B" etc.) is determined, while on the production control board 200 side, based on the main variation pattern. A sub-variation pattern (for example, “SP reach A1, A2 ...”, “SP reach A2, A3 ...”, etc.) of a decorative pattern that defines the scenario of the effect display process in detail is determined. In the variable effect pattern of the decorative pattern, the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, that is, the scenario of a series of effect display processes from the change start to the end of the change of the decorative pattern is defined, and a notice is given at each stage in the display process. The timing for producing the performance is also defined as a time schedule. In addition, regarding the variation effect pattern of this decorative symbol, even if the variation pattern of the special symbol is the same (even when the variation start command of the same information is received), if the effect mode during the stay is different, the effect is changed. Variation effect patterns having different contents can be selected. That is, the variation effect pattern table is prepared for each effect mode during the stay (in the illustrated example, only a common variation effect pattern table that does not depend on the effect mode is provided for convenience).

  The decorative symbol control means 225 is a decoration based on the information (stop symbol information, game state information) included in the variation start command from the main control board 100, and the variation effect pattern determined by the variation effect control means 224. The final combination of symbols (left symbol, middle symbol, right symbol) is determined by lottery. Although details will be described later, in this example, three symbol rows including a plurality of types of decorative symbols are configured, and the decorative symbols are formed by identification elements such as numbers. As described above, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display portion 700 on the screen in a manner linked with the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. At this time, when the variable display of the first special symbol stays in the normal game state where the game is the main subject, mainly the decorative symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is variably displayed on the decorative symbol display portion 700 (the first special symbol). The decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner in conjunction with the variable display of), and the variable display of the second special symbol is the main subject of the game, and stays in the non-normal game state (time saving game state, latent probability variation game state, probability variation game state) In this case, mainly the decorative design corresponding to the second special design is variably displayed on the decorative design display unit 700 (the decorative design is variably displayed in a manner linked to the variable display of the second special design). As a modification thereof, a decorative design corresponding to the first special design (referred to as "first decorative design") and a decorative design corresponding to the second special design (referred to as "second decorative design") Are displayed in parallel on the screen, and the first decorative pattern is variably displayed in a manner linked to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the second decorative symbol is variably linked to the variable display of the second special symbol. The displayed structure may be adopted. In that case, on the screen, the first decorative symbol display unit for variably displaying the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol display unit for variably displaying the second decorative symbol will be allocated. At this time, the first decorative design and the second decorative design may be variably displayed in substantially the same size, or the first decorative design and the second decorative design, which is the main one of the game, is relatively displayed. In addition to the variable display in a large size, the decorative pattern that is not the main subject of the game may be displayed in a relatively small size or may not be displayed in a variable manner.

  Further, the decorative symbol control unit 225 holds a plurality of types of stop symbol pattern tables that are referred to when a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (also referred to as “stop symbol pattern”) is determined by lottery. Examples of the plurality of types of tables include a stop symbol pattern table for big hits, a stop symbol pattern table for small hits, a stop symbol pattern table for out-of-reach, and a stop symbol pattern table for out-of-reach. The stop symbol of the decorative symbol is formed as a combination of three symbols, "stop symbol indicating a big hit (big hit symbol)", "stop symbol indicating a small hit (small hit symbol)", and a stop symbol indicating a detachment. (Outside pattern) "is included. The big hit symbol indicating the specific big hit (probability variation big hit) is a combination of stop modes in which three symbols of the same odd number are arranged (for example, "7,7,7"). The big hit symbol indicating a normal big hit (uncertain variation big hit) is a combination of stop modes in which three symbols of the same even number are arranged (for example, "2.2.2"). The off symbol is a combination of stop modes in which at least one of the three symbols is a symbol of a number different from other numbers (for example, "1.3.8"). Here, among the out-of-symbol symbols, the out-reach symbol is a combination of stop modes in which only the middle symbol is shifted back and forth in a state where the left symbol and the right symbol are coincident (for example, "3.1.3"). Become. In the case of a small-hit symbol or a big-hit symbol or a 2R big-hit symbol, for example, a combination of predetermined stop modes such as "3/5/7" may be used. If the result of the lottery is non-reach, a specific outcome called a so-called "opportunity eye" (for example, "1, 2, 3" or "5, 6, 7" as the regular eye, "2.2.3" or "5.5.6" may be selected as the misalignment. Furthermore, in the case of a pseudo continuous effect (so-called pseudo-relation) or the like, when performing an effect of temporarily stopping the display before finally displaying the final stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol is selected. When displaying a chance eye or a temporary stop design, at least one of the three designs is replaced with a special design that displays characters such as "CHANCE" or "NEXT" for the numerical design. There is a case (for example, “1 · CHANGE / 3” or “2 · NEXT / 3”). Note that the stop order for stopping the decorative symbols is predetermined for each of the variable effect patterns described below, and in the present embodiment, in principle, the symbols are stopped in the order of left symbol → right symbol → middle symbol. However, in the case of the variation effect pattern of the shortening variation in which the variation time is set to be extremely short, the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol are stopped almost at the same time, and in the case of the special variation effect pattern, the right symbol → It is possible to stop in the order of the middle symbol → the left symbol, and in this case, the jackpot expectation tends to be relatively high. In addition, whichever the stop order is, it is desirable that the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol start varying at the same time when the variation starts. However, as a special variation effect pattern, the variation may be started in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol.

  The notice production control unit 226 draws a notice production pattern that defines the content of the notice production executed in each stage of the variation process of the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variation production pattern determined by the variation production control unit 224. Determined by The notice effect pattern includes an effect pattern for temporarily or stepwise displaying an image of a specific character, animation, etc., an effect pattern for outputting a specific sound, an effect pattern for operating a movable accessory, and the like. The notice production is executed in parallel with the variable display of the decorative symbol, and predictively suggests that the symbol variation is high and the jackpot reliability is high. The notice effect includes a notice effect executed before the reach state occurs (including the reach occurrence time) and a notice effect executed after the reach state occurs in the variable display process of the decorative pattern. The notice performances have different jackpot reliability, and basically, the notice effect displayed after the reach occurs has a relatively higher jackpot expectation than the notice effect displayed before the reach occurs. It's getting higher. The notice production control means 226 holds a notice lottery table that is referred to when selecting a notice production pattern for each type of notice production, and a notice corresponding to the type of notice production that occurs according to the scenario of the variable production pattern. It is designed to select a lottery table. It should be noted that, as concrete types of notice production, for example, comment notice production, background notice production, SU (step-up) notice production, logo notice production, mini character notice production, group notice production, character notice production, etc. are prepared. ing. This notice effect is basically performed by synthesizing the display of one or a plurality of notice effects on the variable display of the decorative pattern on the effect display device 70. Therefore, even in the case of the variable display of the decorative pattern by the same variable effect pattern, it is possible to generate various effect modes by combining with one or a plurality of notice effects.

  The special game production control means 227, the contents of the big hit medium production that informs that it is in the big hit game (big hit production pattern), and the contents of the small hit medium production that informs that it is in the small hit game (small hit production pattern) ) And decide. The big hit medium effect or the small hit medium effect, the start demonstration effect for notifying the start of the big hit game or the small hit game, the round effect for notifying that the round game is in progress, and the end of the big hit game or the small hit game Including the end demonstration production. When the special game effect control means 227 receives a big hit start demo command or a small hit start demo command from the main control board 100, based on the big hit type information stored in the sub-main information storage means 260, etc., a big hit mid effect pattern. Alternatively, a small hit mid effect pattern (start demonstration effect pattern, round effect pattern, end demonstration effect pattern) is determined. A start demonstration effect time, a round effect time (effect time corresponding to the opening pattern of the special winning opening 54), and an end demo effect time are set in the big hit effect pattern or the small hit effect effect pattern. A series of performance contents are set along the time axis. Further, the special game effect control means 227 executes the start demonstration effect upon receiving the big hit start demo command or the small hit start demo command from the main control board 100 in accordance with the big hit effect pattern or the small hit effect pattern, and the round. Each round effect is executed upon receiving the effect designating command, and the end demonstration effect is executed upon receiving the big hit end demo command or the small hit end demo command. In the big hit start demonstration production, for example, the characters "start big hit" are displayed on the screen to announce the start of the big hit game. In the round effect, for example, the number of currently executed rounds and the number of won prize balls are displayed on the screen, and various images (animation images, etc.) that excite the big hit game are displayed. Then, in the big hit end demonstration effect, for example, a character "big hit end" is displayed on the screen to notify the end of the big hit game. In addition, the small hitting medium performance may be configured with the same effect contents as the above big winning medium performance, and the stop symbol (small hit symbol) of the decorative pattern which is the trigger of the small jackpot winning is confirmed and displayed. It may be a production in which the closed state is maintained. In the present embodiment, the effect during the small hit is not an effect that clearly informs that the big hit game is currently being executed like the effect during the big hit (in the case of the small hit, the small hit game is currently being executed). It is not an effect that clearly informs that), but the effect before the small hit game start (variable effect) is continuously performed, and the effect is continuously performed during the small hit game and after the small hit game is finished. Then, it may be displayed so as not to know that the small hitting game is being played (as if it is a variation display). However, this configuration is based on the premise that the big hit midfield effect is an effect different from before and after the big hit game (an effect different from the variable effect).

  As described above, the effect generalizing means 220 generates an image control command related to an image and a sound based on the determined effect contents (prefetch effect pattern, variation effect pattern, notice effect pattern, stop pattern pattern, big hit effect pattern, etc.), This is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260.

  The lamp control means 230 controls the lighting of the effect lamp, the emission color, etc. according to the effect contents set by the effect control means 220. The lamp control means 230 holds a plurality of types of lamp data (lamp pattern data) for controlling lighting of the effect lamp LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 80), and the lamp data according to the determined effect pattern. Is read out and this lamp control signal (lamp data) is transmitted to the lamp connection board 91.

  The accessory control means 240 controls the drive of each movable accessory 24 according to the effect contents set by the effect control means 220. The accessory control means 240 holds a plurality of types of drive data for controlling the drive of the movable accessory 24, and transmits a drive control signal (drive data) corresponding to the determined effect pattern to the motor driver 92. .

  The error effect control means 250 is configured to determine an error effect pattern when an error effect designation command is received from the main control board 100, and notify that an error state has occurred in the gaming machine according to the error effect pattern. There is.

  The sub-main information storage unit 260 is configured to temporarily store information on a decorative pattern, information on a fluctuating effect pattern, information on a notice effect pattern, information on a control command, etc., and a predetermined value for storing each information. It has a storage area. For example, in the command storage area, an effect control command buffer for storing effect control commands from the main control board 100, an image control command buffer for storing image control commands to the image control board 300, and an image control board 300. ACK command buffer for storing ACK commands from. Each command buffer is composed of a ring buffer, and can store a predetermined number of effect control commands, image control commands, and ACK commands.

  The command transmitting / receiving unit 270 is configured to receive the effect control command transmitted from the main control board 100 and store the effect control command in the effect control command buffer of the sub-main information storage unit 260. The command transmitting / receiving means 270 executes an interrupt based on the input of the above-mentioned strobe signal from the main control board 100 to execute reception interrupt processing (details will be described later) of the production control command, and in this interrupt processing, various production control commands are executed. I'm supposed to get it. When the strobe signal is received, the command transmitting / receiving means 270 preferentially performs the reception interrupt processing of this effect control command over other interrupt processing (interrupt processing of priority level 7 or lower described later). ing.

  Further, the command transmission / reception means 270 stores in the sub-main information storage means 260 in order to instruct execution of the effect contents (variable effect pattern information, notice effect pattern information, decorative design information, etc.) set by the effect control means 220. The generated image control command is transmitted to the image control board 300 by a serial communication method. As a general rule, the image control command is transmitted every predetermined period (500 μs in this example) according to the order set in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260. Thereby, the image control board 300 analyzes various image control commands transmitted from the effect control board 200, and causes the effect display device 70 to variably display the effect image including the decorative pattern according to the scenario of the variable effect pattern. At each stage of the variable display process, the notice effect is displayed by being superimposed on the effect of the symbol change. Further, the command transmitting / receiving unit 270 receives the ACK command transmitted from the image control board 300 and stores the ACK command in the ACK command buffer of the sub-main information storage unit 260.

[Game flow]
Next, the game flow of this embodiment will be described. As described above, FIG. 8 is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of game states, a normal game state, a time saving game state, a latent probability variation game state, and a probability variation game state are set. Then, the normal mode and the special mode are set as the effect mode corresponding to the normal game state, the time saving mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the time saving game state, and the latent probability mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the latent probability changing game state. The probability variation mode is set as the effect mode corresponding to the probability variation gaming state. The normal mode and the special mode corresponding to the normal gaming state may have the same mode as the mode of the effect mode (background image, effect stage). That is, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern table) is not made different for the purpose of differentiating the effect mode within the limited period and outside the limited period, but within the limited period. Because the purpose is to quickly extinguish the operation reserve ball (remaining reserve) of the second special symbol, it is not necessary to differentiate the production mode (production mode) between the limited period and the limited period, but rather the same. It is desirable to digest the operation holding ball (remaining hold) of the second special symbol in the production mode (production mode) of.

<Normal game state>
First, when the power is turned on, the pachinko gaming machine PM is set to the normal gaming state (low probability low base state), and the gaming is started from this normal gaming state. When the game state is the normal game state, the frequency of entering the game ball into the first starting opening 51 is set to be higher than the frequency of entering the game ball into the second starting opening 52, so left-handed (Aim the left-side area PA1 to shoot the game ball) to enter the game ball into the first starting port 51, the first special symbol win / fail judgment (variation display of the first special symbol) is executed mainly It becomes a game play. When staying in this normal game state, the effect mode is controlled to the normal mode or the special mode. In this normal gaming state, if the result of the determination result of the first special symbol corresponds to a big hit, as the big hit type, "10R specific big hit" is 10%, "4R specific big hit 1" is 20%, "4R specific big hit 2" 35%, and "4R regular jackpot" is 35%. When the big hit type is "10R specific big hit 1" or "4R specific big hit 1", after the end of the big hit game, the latent probability variation game state is entered. Further, when the big hit type is "4R specific big hit 2", after the big hit game is over, it shifts to the probability variation game state. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "4R normal big hit", after the big hit game is over, the game shifts to a time saving game state.

<Time saving game state>
When the gaming state shifts to a time saving gaming state (low probability high base state), the electric Chu support function operates to increase the easiness of entering the gaming ball into the second starting opening 52. By shooting the game ball aiming at the PA2) to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 52, the game characteristic of mainly executing the judgment of whether the second special symbol is valid or not (variable display of the second special symbol) Becomes At this time, in the short game state, the probability of winning the big hit in the special symbol win / fail judgment is the same as the normal game state, and the probability is low, but it becomes a high base state in which the electric Chu support function is activated, and the game is held while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held. Can proceed. At this time, while staying in the short-time gaming state, the effect mode is controlled to the short-time mode. At this time, in the short game state, if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol corresponds to a big hit, as the big hit type, "10R specific big hit" is 30%, "6R specific big hit" is 10%, "4R specific big hit 1" With a winning probability of 10%, “4R special jackpot 2” is 15%, and “2R regular jackpot” is 35%. When the jackpot type is "10R specified jackpot 1", "6R specified jackpot" or "4R specified jackpot 1", after the jackpot game is over, the latent latent variation game state is entered. In addition, when the big hit type is "4R specific big hit 1", after the big hit game is over, the probability shift game state is entered. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "2R normal big hit", after the big hit game is over, the game shifts to the time saving game state again. In addition, this time shortening game state is counted from after the big hit game ends, and continues until the variable display number of special symbols reaches 70 times. Therefore, when the variable display number of special symbols reaches 70 times without the next big hit in the time saving game state, the time saving game state ends at this time, and the game falls to the normal game state.

<Hidden probability variation game state>
When the gaming state shifts to the latent probability change gaming state (high probability low base state), the electric Chu support function does not operate, so it is originally recommended to hit left with the first starting port 51. In the present embodiment, the ball entry frequency of the second starting opening 52 is set to be relatively high even in this low base state, and the small hitting game is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52. A characteristic game that occurs frequently (small hit RUSH: details will be described later) is performed, so that a game ball is hit to the right with a second start opening 52 rather than a game ball is put into the first start opening 51 by a left hit. It is a good idea to enter the ball in, and as a result, it becomes a game property that mainly executes the determination of whether or not the second special symbol is valid (variable display of the second special symbol). When staying in the latent probability variation game state, the effect mode is controlled to the latent probability mode. In this latent probability variation gaming state, if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol corresponds to a jackpot, as the jackpot type, "10R specific jackpot" 30%, "6R specified jackpot" 10%, "4R jackpot 1 10%, “4R specific jackpot 2” is 15%, and “2R regular jackpot” is 35%. When the jackpot type is "10R specified jackpot 1", "6R specified jackpot" or "4R specified jackpot 1", after the jackpot game is over, the latent latent variation game state is entered. In addition, when the big hit type is "4R specific big hit 1", after the big hit game is over, the probability shift game state is entered. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "2R normal big hit", after the big hit game is over, the game shifts to a time saving game state. The latent probability variation game state is counted from the end of the big hit game, and continues until the variable display number of special symbols reaches 100 times. Therefore, when the variation display number of the special symbol reaches 100 times without the next big hit in the latent probability variation game state, this latent probability variation game state ends and falls to the normal game state. Here, when the game state is a latent probability change game state, small hits frequently occur in the hit determination of the second special symbol, and the game ball easily enters the big winning opening 54 during the small hit game. , It becomes a game that aims to increase the number of balls by small hit game. That is, while staying in this latent probability variation gaming state, enter the game ball into the second starting opening 52 and perform the variable display of the second special symbol with high frequency, until the next big hit occurs. It is possible to execute the small hit game with high frequency. The game playability of the latent probability variation game state (small hit RUSH mode described later) will be described later.

<Probability variation game state>
When the gaming state shifts to the probability changing gaming state (high probability high base state), the electric Chu support function operates, so that the easiness of entering the gaming ball into the second starting opening 52 is increased, so that the player is right-handed (right side region). By shooting the game ball aiming at the PA2) to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 52, the game characteristic of mainly executing the judgment of whether the second special symbol is valid or not (variable display of the second special symbol) Becomes This probability variation game state, the second starting opening 52 becomes easy to enter the ball, the probability of winning a big jackpot in the determination of whether or not the special symbol is high probability is high, so the big jackpot of the second special symbol is likely to occur early. can do. When staying in this probability variation game state, the effect mode is controlled to the probability variation mode. In this probability variation game state, if the result of the determination result of the second special symbol corresponds to a big hit, as the big hit type, "10R specific big hit" is 30%, "6R specific big hit" is 10%, "4R specific big hit 1" With a winning probability of 10%, “4R special jackpot 2” is 15%, and “2R regular jackpot” is 35%. When the jackpot type is "10R specified jackpot 1", "6R specified jackpot" or "4R specified jackpot 1", after the jackpot game is over, the latent latent variation game state is entered. In addition, when the big hit type is "4R specific big hit 1", after the big hit game is over, the probability shift game state is entered. On the other hand, when the big hit type is "2R normal big hit", after the big hit game is over, the game shifts to a time saving game state. In addition, this probability variation game state is counted from the end of the big hit game, and continues until the variable display number of special symbols reaches 100 times. Therefore, when the variation display number of the special symbol reaches 100 times without the next big hit in the probability variation gaming state, this probability variation gaming state ends and the game falls to the normal gaming state.

  Here, in the non-normal game state (time saving game state, latent probability variation game state, probability variation game state), the number of times the variable display of the special symbol is the specified ST number (100 times) or a predetermined number of times (70 times) ends When the game state falls to the normal game state, the special mode is set as the effect mode within the limited period (4 rotations) immediately after the transition to the normal game state. This special mode is a production mode that is set when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state), so originally it is determined whether or not the first special symbol is valid (variation display of the first special symbol). ) Should be the main body of the game, but it is highly possible that the operation reserve balls (4 pieces) of the second special symbol that occurred during the execution of the non-normal game state are extremely high, and basically, It becomes a game property that mainly executes the determination of whether the second special symbol is valid or not (variable display of the second special symbol). In addition, as will be described later in detail, within this limited period, in order to efficiently digest the operation holding ball (remaining hold) of the second special symbol (the variation time of the second special symbol becomes extremely long, In order to avoid), the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is set relatively high. Then, when the limited period of the special effect mode ends (when the variable display number of special symbols reaches 4 times), the mode shifts to the normal mode. When you move to this normal mode, basically, all the operation holding balls of the second special symbol should have already been exhausted within the limited period, so it is judged whether the first special symbol is correct or not (variation display of the first special symbol). ) Return to the game play that actively executes.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, each one of the combination operation gates 91 and 92 is arranged in the left area PA1 and the right area PA2 of the game board 20, and the special symbol is a big hit in any game state. Even when the symbols are stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is started with the fact that the game balls have entered the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92 after the jackpot symbols are stopped and displayed. Therefore, even if the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot pattern, the jackpot game is not started unless the game ball is passed through the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92.

[Playability in latent accuracy mode]
Next, the playability of the latent probability mode (probability of latent change) will be described. Latent probability mode (latent probability game state), frequent the small hit in the winning determination of the second special symbol triggered by entering the game ball into the second starting opening 52, until the big hit is won. It is a game that aims to continuously and intensively generate small hit games. Hereinafter, the latent probability mode is also referred to as "small hit RUSH mode".

  When the game state is the latent probability variation game state, when the game ball passes through the operation gate 53, the hit is derived with an extremely high probability (1 / 1.02) in the judgment of the normal symbol. In this latent probability variation game state (low base state), if the winning / deciding judgment of the ordinary symbol is won, the ordinary electric accessory 522 performs the opening operation for one second three times. Therefore, if the player is hitting the right at the second starting opening 52, it is possible or easy to insert the game ball into the second starting opening 52 while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is in the open state. is there. Also, in this latent probability variation gaming state, the winning probability of the small hit in the winning / non-winning judgment of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and moreover, when the small hit is won. Since the variation time of the two special symbols is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), it is highly possible that a small hit frequently occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52.

  At this time, while the normal electric auditors' 522 is performing the opening operation three times for 1 second, when the game ball enters the second starting opening 52 and wins the small hit, the second special symbol The fluctuation display of is ended within an extremely short time, and the small hit game is immediately started. Here, the normal electric accessory 522 is configured to perform the closing operation for 2 seconds immediately after performing the opening operation for 1 second (excluding the opening operation for the third time). Therefore, after the small hit game is started, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 is a normal electric auditors's handpiece 522 (movable) while the normal electric auditors' handpiece 522 is performing a closing operation for 2 seconds. It is easy to reach the special winning opening 54 through the upper surface of the member 524). Therefore, during the execution of the small hitting game, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 passes through the upper surface of the movable member 524 without entering the ordinary electric accessory 522, and the big prize is arranged diagonally below it. By flowing down toward the mouth 54, it is possible to enter the special winning opening 54. Therefore, when the game state is the latent probability variation game state, the game ball is inserted into the second starting opening 52 and the variable display of the second special symbol is frequently displayed, until the next big hit occurs. It becomes a game property that a small hit game is executed with high frequency. Thereby, each time a small hit game is executed, about 2 to 3 game balls are inserted into the big winning opening 54, and about 20 to 30 prize balls are continuously acquired each time, so that the player It becomes possible to advance the game while increasing the number of balls.

  On the other hand, even when the gaming state is a time-saving gaming state or a probability variation gaming state, the winning probability of the small hit is extremely high in the determination of the second special symbol, and the variation time of the small hit is set to be extremely short, Small hit games are more likely to occur frequently. However, to limit the game performance of the small hit RUSH to only the latent probability change game state, and for the game states other than the latent probability change game state, the following measures are taken in order to suppress the increase in the number of balls held by the small hit game. Has been.

  Specifically, when the game state is a time saving game state or a probability variation game state, when the game ball passes through the actuation gate 53, the hit is derived with a very high probability (1 / 1.01) in the judgment of the normal symbol. It In this gaming state (high base state), if the winning / deciding judgment of the ordinary symbol is won, the ordinary electric accessory 522 performs one opening operation for 5.9 seconds. Therefore, if the player is hitting the right at the second starting opening 52, it is extremely easy to insert the game ball into the second starting opening 52 while the ordinary electric accessory 522 is in the open state. . In addition, even in this short time gaming state or probability variation gaming state, the winning probability of the small hit in the win / no judgment of the second special symbol is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1), and the small hit is won. Since the variation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), there is a possibility that a small hit frequently occurs based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52. high.

  Here, if the game ball enters the second starting port 52 and wins the small hit while the normal electric accessory 522 is performing the opening operation for 5.9 seconds, the second special symbol The variable display ends in an extremely short time, and the small hit game is immediately started. At this time, if the small hit game is executed while the ordinary electric accessory 522 continues the opening operation (while the second starting opening 52 is in the open state), it flows down the right side area PA2. The game sphere to be played is extremely easy to enter the normal electric auditors' handpiece 522 being opened, and the possibility of reaching the special winning opening 54 is significantly reduced. On the other hand, if the small hit game is executed after the normal electric accessory 522 is closed (after the second starting opening 52 is in the closed state), the subsequent game ball passes through the operation gate 53. Since the time from when the normal electric accessory 522 is opened is set to an extremely short time (fluctuation time 0.2 seconds + stop time 0.1 seconds), the normal electric accessory 522 is immediately opened. It is easy for game balls to enter 522. In other words, during the execution of the small hit game, the normal electric auditors product 522 (the second starting port 52) is almost open, and the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 is the normal electric auditors member in the open state. It is extremely easy to enter the object 522 (the second starting opening 52), and it is extremely difficult to enter the object into the large winning opening 54 arranged downstream thereof. Therefore, when the gaming state is a time saving gaming state or a probability variation gaming state (high base state), even if a small hit frequently occurs in the winning / absence determination of the second special symbol, the gaming ball reaches the special winning opening 54. The possibility is extremely low, and it is extremely difficult to increase the number of payouts by a small hit game.

  Even when the game state is the normal game state (excluding the limited period), the winning probability of the small hit is set to an extremely high probability (about 1 / 1.1) in the determination of the second special symbol. However, since the variation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes or more), the player enters the game ball into the second starting opening 52 and performs a game aiming for a small hit. Even so, the efficiency of digesting the second special symbol is very poor, and the small hit game cannot be frequently made. If it is within the limited period of the normal gaming state, the limited frequency selection state is set as the variation pattern selection state, and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be relatively high (of the second special symbol). The fluctuation time will not be extremely long). The reason why the limited frequency selection state is provided as the variation pattern selection state and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is increased within the limited period immediately after the transition to the normal game state will be described later.

[About the inrush rate in the latent probability mode]
Next, the inrush rate of the latent probability mode (latent probability variation game state) will be described. As shown in FIG. 7, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, when the big hit type is "10R specified big hit" or "4R specified big hit 1", the gaming state at the time of big hit winning Regardless, the latent probability variation game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. For other jackpot types (4R specific jackpot 2, 4R regular jackpot), regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the latent probability variation gaming state is not set as the gaming state after the jackpot game is over. . At this time, for the jackpot type of the first special symbol, "10R specific jackpot" occurs with a winning probability of 10%, and "4R specific jackpot 1" occurs with a winning probability of 20%. Therefore, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the rush rate (probability of transition) to the latent probability variation game state is always "30%" regardless of the game state at the time of big hit winning.

  On the other hand, when the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, when the big hit type is "10R specified big hit", "6R specified big hit", "4R specified big hit", the gaming state at the time of big hit winning If it is a normal game state, the probability variation game state is set as the game state after the big hit game is finished (the latent probability variation game state is not set), and the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the time saving game state, the latency probability variation game state, If the probability variation gaming state, the latent probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the end of the big hit game. In other words, if you win the "10R specific jackpot", "6R specific jackpot", "4R specified jackpot" as the specific jackpot to which the probability fluctuation function and the fluctuation time shortening function of the special symbol are awarded, the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is If it is in the normal game state, the electric Chu support function is given after the big hit game is finished, but if the game state at the time of big hit winning is the time saving game state, the latent certain change game state, the certain change game state, after the big hit game Den Chu support function is not added. At this time, if the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol becomes the main subject of the game, so if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit (so-called accident hit) , It is possible to suppress the transition to the latent probability variation game state (small hit RUSH mode), which is the most advantageous state for the player, and to ensure a fair and fair game. Also, in the normal gaming state, when a special big hit of the second special symbol occurs, by shifting to the probability variation gaming state instead of the latent probability variation gaming state, right-handing in the normal gaming state (there is also a possibility to enter in the normal gaming state or By hitting the right at the second starting opening 52 that is easy to enter the ball) by obtaining a specific jackpot of the second special symbol, a fraudulent act such as forcibly plunging from the normal gaming state to the latent probability variation gaming state (small hitting RUSH mode) Can be prevented. For other jackpot types (4R specific jackpot 2, 2R normal jackpot), regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot, the latent latent variation game state is not set as the gaming state after the jackpot game is over. . At this time, for the jackpot type of the second special symbol, "10R specific jackpot" occurs with a probability of winning 30%, "6R jackpot" occurs with a probability of 10%, and "4R jackpot 1" Occurs with a 10% chance of winning. Therefore, if the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, if the gaming state at the time of big hit is the normal gaming state, the rush rate (transition probability) to the latent probability variation gaming state becomes "0%", If the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the time saving game state, the latent probability variation game state, or the probability variation game state, the rush rate (transition probability) to the latency probability variation game state is "50%".

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, while making a difference in the transition condition to the small hit RUSH mode (latent probability variation game state), until reaching this small hit RUSH mode Since it is possible to have variations in the way of transition of the game state, it is possible to create a game property that is complicated and diversified that has never existed before.

[Regarding the performance of the latent accuracy mode]
Next, the main contents of the effect in the latent accuracy mode (small hit RUSH mode) will be described. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing the flow of the latent probability mode insulting effect as the effect executed in the latent accuracy mode. When the effect mode is the latent probability mode, the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed on the screen of the effect display device 70. During the execution of the latent probability mode, in the variable display of the second special symbol, whether or not the latent probability mode continues, or the latent probability mode fanning effect to fuel whether or not the latent probability mode ends is executed. It is possible. The latent probability mode incentive effect includes a latent probability mode continuation effect that suggests or informs that the latent probability mode will continue, and a latent probability mode end effect that suggests or notifies that the latent probability mode will end.

  During the execution of the latent probability mode (hidden probability variation game state), as described above, the SP reach effect (a battle effect in which an ally character plays against an enemy character) is executed as a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Can be done. In the present embodiment, the SP reach effect (battle effect) is configured to also serve as the latent probability mode inspiring effect. In other words, the latent mode agitation effect is executed during the variable display with the possibility that the latent mode continues after the variation display or the possibility that the latent mode ends with the variation display. The content is suggested or notified based on the contents of the reach effect (effect result). It should be noted that the “end of the latent mode” includes the temporary termination of the latent mode (latent probability game state). In other words, if you win in the battle production, the big hit game starts, so the big hit game state (normal game state / low probability low base state) is set once, but after the big hit game ends Since it will enter the certainty mode (latent certainty variation game state) (except "4R specific jackpot 2"), the latent probability mode end suggestion production is that the latentity mode (latent probability variation game state) ends "once" It can be said that it is suggesting or informing.

  As described above, the SP reach effect executed during the latent probability mode is configured as a battle effect in which the teammate character plays against the enemy character. If the ally character wins the enemy character in this battle production, it is confirmed that the "specific jackpot" is won on the variation display, and if the ally character is defeated by the enemy character, the "normal jackpot" is won on the variation display. It is confirmed that you have done it. That is, when the battle effect is a battle result of victory or defeat, it is confirmed that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display, and the latent probability mode is triggered when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. It will end. Therefore, the winning effect or the defeating effect in the battle effect of the variable display is configured as a latent mode end effect that suggests or informs that the latent mode ends with the variable display. On the other hand, if the battle effect is a draw result, it is decided that the deviation symbol will be stopped and displayed at the end of the variable display, and the latent mode will be maintained even after the end of the variable display (variable display after the next time). Will continue. Therefore, in the battle effect of the variable display, the effect that the ally character is drawn with the enemy character suggests or informs that the latent mode is continued even after the end of the variable display (variable display after the next time). It is configured as a mode continuation effect.

  Here, when the production mode in which the user is currently staying is the latent accuracy mode, as described above, since the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly the game playability, it is displayed on the screen of the production display device 70. , The variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is mainly performed. On the other hand, when the production mode in which the player is currently staying is the latent probability mode, when the variation display of the first special symbol (big hit variation display) is executed because the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, At a predetermined timing during the variable display or the stop display of the first special symbol, the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly ended to correspond to the variable display of the first special symbol. It switches to a fluctuation production. However, only the variation effect of the second special symbol on the screen is only forcibly ended, and the variable display itself of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 72 is continuously performed. The “predetermined timing” is preferably, for example, the timing at which the result of the win or failure is notified in the variable display or the timing immediately before that.

  At this time, if the hit determination result of the first special symbol is a big hit, until the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is finished, the hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit that the big hit is not derived. In the non-lottery state, only the “small hit” or “out” is derived as a result of the hit / non-win determination of the second special symbol. Therefore, during the execution of the big hit variation display of the first special symbol, even if the variation display of the second special symbol is performed, only the small hit variation display or the outlier variation display is performed as the variation display of the second special symbol. Be seen. Therefore, during the execution of the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol, since the jackpot variation display of the second special symbol is not performed, before the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is finished, the second A battle effect (battle victory effect, battle defeat effect) that suggests or informs that the result of the special symbol hit judgment is a big hit, that is, a latent mode end effect that suggests or informs that the latent probability mode will end It does not appear.

  On the other hand, since the variation time of the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes), until the big hit variation display of this first special symbol reaches the end (the first special symbol Until the change to the change effect corresponding to the change display), the change display of the second special symbol (small hit change display, deviating change display) can be executed a plurality of times. Until the big hit variation display of the first special symbol reaches the end, only the small hit variation display or the outlying variation display of the second special symbol can be executed, and the variation corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol As an effect, an effect (including a battle draw effect) that suggests or informs that the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol has been a small hit or a miss can be executed. That is, until the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is completed, it is definite that the latent probability mode continues, and until the variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol is switched to, As a variation effect corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol, a battle draw effect that suggests or informs that the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is out of order, that is, suggests that the latent probability mode continues. The latent accuracy mode continuous effect can be executed. In addition, until the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol reaches the end (until it is switched to the variation production corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol), in addition to the latent probability mode continuous production, the second The small hitting winning effect that is performed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed as the small hitting symbol can be executed. Note that this small hit winning effect may be included as a kind of latent accuracy mode continuous effect.

[Fluctuation of special mode]
Next, the changing state of the special mode will be described. FIG. 18 is a schematic diagram for explaining the changing state of the special mode. The latent probability variation game state, as described above, continues until the total number of variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs. Therefore, the latent probability variation gaming state ends when the total of the variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times) without the next big hit. Then, when the latent probability variation game state ends, the game state falls to the normal game state. This normal game state is a low-probability low base state, and is basically a game property in which a game ball is inserted into the first starting opening 51 and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed. In this normal game state, like the above-mentioned latent probability variation game state, the electric Chu support function is not operating, but the ease of entering the second starting opening 52 is secured to some extent, and it is realistic. It is possible or easy to insert the game ball into the second starting opening 52 by making a right hit.

  At this time, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (when the latent probability change gaming state falls to the normal gaming state), in order to limit the situation in which the small hit game frequently occurs in this normal gaming state, the variation of the second special symbol By setting the time to an extremely long time, it is desirable to suppress the action of right-handing (aiming the game ball to enter the second starting opening 52) in this normal game state. When the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state, as described above, the gaming ball is inserted into the second starting opening 52, and it is the gaming property that mainly executes the variable display of the second special symbol. At the end of the probability variation game state (when transitioning to the normal game state), it is extremely likely that the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol will remain. Therefore, in a few revolutions immediately after the transition to the normal game state, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is digested, and the variation display of the second special symbol is set to be performed for an extremely long time. In the case, especially, when the variable display of the second special symbol is the big hit variable display, a special screen (still image) for indicating or notifying the big hit winning is continuously displayed for a long time during the execution of the variable display. As a result, a beginner or the like may not understand the current game situation (what is happening), and may cause many players to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, for the limited period immediately after shifting from the advantageous gaming state (time saving gaming state, latent probability variation gaming state, probability variation gaming state) to the normal gaming state, the variation pattern selection state is set to the limited frequency selection state, and the second special By shortening the variation time of the symbol, the residual retention of the second special symbol can be quickly digested.

  First, also in the present embodiment, as a general rule, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, outside the limited period (normal mode), the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely long for the same purpose as before. It is set to (10 minutes or more) to suppress the act of striking to the right in the dark. Specifically, outside the limited period of the normal game state (normal mode), the variation pattern selection state is set to the normal selection state, the variation time of the second special symbol, the variation pattern table 1 (FIG. 10) It will be selected by reference. In this normal selection state, the variation display time of the second special symbol is extremely long, regardless of the result of the determination result of the second special symbol, so the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is extremely poor. Will be things. As a modification thereof, at least only the small hit variation display may have an extremely long variation time.

  On the other hand, in the limited period immediately after shifting to the normal game state (special mode), the variation pattern selection state is set to the limited frequency selection state, and the variation time of the second special symbol is the variation pattern table 2 ( It will be selected with reference to FIG. If the variation pattern selection state is a limited frequency selection state, the variation time of the second special symbol is shortened irrespective of the result of the determination result of the second special symbol, and the variation pattern selection state is the normal selection state Compared with, the average value of the variation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter. That is, in the variable display within the limited period immediately after the transition to the normal game state (variable display within four rotations), the second variation is displayed more than the variation display after the limited period has elapsed (variation display after the fifth rotation). The variation time of the special symbol (average value of the variation time) is shortened, and the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is set to be high. Therefore, within the limited period immediately after the transition to the normal game state, the operation holding ball (remaining holding) of the second special symbol can be quickly exhausted (the extremely long-term variation display is executed as before). However, even when the latent probability change game state is dropped to the normal game state, a speedy game is carried out within the limited period, so that the player can proceed with the game without any discomfort. As a modified example of the present embodiment, with respect to FIG. 18, the variation display of the first special symbol in the latent probability variation gaming state may be “short variation” similarly to the variation display of the second special symbol. Further, with respect to FIG. 18, the main effect within the limited period of the normal game state may be a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed or As a simple display mode such as a reduced display, an effect that is conspicuous only when a big hit occurs, and other than that, a variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed).

  Regarding the variation pattern selection state, the limited frequency selection state within the limited period is the same as the normal selection state outside the limited period, the gaming state is the normal gaming state (the gaming state in which the variable time shortening function of the special symbol is not operating). Since it is a variation pattern selection state set corresponding to that, the latent probability variation game state before the transition (game state in which the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is operating) is set corresponding to the latent state. Compared with the certain selection state, the variation efficiency of the second special symbol is relatively low. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variation efficiency of the second special symbol in the order of “normal game state (normal mode)” <“normal game state (special mode)” <“latent probability variation game state (latent probability mode)” It is configured to be high. In other words, in the order of "normal game state (normal mode)" <"normal game state (special mode)" <"latent probability variation game state (latent probability mode)", the average value of the variation time of the second special symbol is short. Become. The relationship between the long and short of the average value of the fluctuation time is the same in the advantageous game states (time saving game state, probability variation game state) other than the latent probability variation game state. Therefore, in FIG. 18, the process of transitioning from the latent probability variation game state to the normal game state is described, but instead, the process of transitioning from the time saving game state or the probability variation game state to the normal game state is applied. Also, the same relationship as above is established, and the same action and effect are obtained. In addition, as the term used above, "the average value of the variation time (variation display time)" is, the variation display time is actually measured for each variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the average based on the actual measurement value. It is not limited to the meaning of taking a value. More specifically, for each variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (every variation start), the variation display time is determined, and should be determined (selected). When there are multiple types of variation display time candidates, an expected value based on the multiple types of variation display times (the sum of “selection probability × variation display time” in each variation time, for example, a certain variation state ( When 10 seconds is selected as 50%, 30 seconds is 30%, and 60 seconds is 20% in the state of referring to the fluctuation pattern table), “10 seconds × 0.5 + 30 seconds × 0.3 + 60 seconds × 0.2 = 26 seconds ”is the average value of the variable display time period), but if there is one type of variable display period candidate to be selected, the one variable display period itself is the average value. (For example, a certain fluctuation state (a certain fluctuation Over at down with reference to the table are states), if only 10 seconds there is no selection candidate, "10 seconds × 1.0 (100%) = 10 seconds" is the average value of the variation display time). As a method for realizing different "average values of the variable display time", different candidates for the variable display time and / or selection probabilities are used, or even if the candidates for the variable display time and / or the selection probabilities are the same. There are various methods such as changing the period value when adding the variable display time, but the method is not limited to either method.

[Regarding the special mode mode]
Next, the presentation mode of the special mode will be described. Here, within a few revolutions immediately after the transition to the normal game state, when the result of the determination of the second special symbol is a big hit (so-called accident hit), a special screen (still image) for suggesting or notifying this big hit is extremely It is desirable to be displayed continuously for a long time, but by performing such a display, a skilled player or the like recognizes the occurrence of a big hit, and until the long-time variable display of the second special symbol ends. During this period, the firing of the game balls may be stopped so as to reduce the number of balls held as much as possible, and the operating rate of the game machine may be reduced.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 18, within the limited period immediately after shifting to the normal game state, as described above, the variation pattern selection state is set to the limited frequency selection state, and the average variation time of the second special symbols is set. By shortening the value and displaying the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol on the screen of the effect display device 70, the special screen for an extremely long time is not displayed, and the player It is possible to continue the launch of the game ball without any discomfort, and it is possible to prevent the operating rate of the gaming machine from decreasing.

[Common use of double duty operation gate]
In the conventional game machine, within a few revolutions immediately after the latent probability variation game state ends and the game state shifts to the normal game state, the operation reserve ball of the second special symbol generated during the latent probability variation game state is digested, The variable display of the second special symbol is easily performed. At this time, if the result of the determination of the second special symbol is a big hit (a so-called accident hit), only in the right side area PA2 (near the special winning opening 54), if the winning combination operation gate is arranged, the game is played. If the person does not know the existence of the winning combination operation gate, or cannot recognize the occurrence of this big hit and is hitting the left at the first starting opening 54, the waiting state of the big hit game continues for a long time (it is quite There is a possibility that the jackpot game cannot be started) and the game cannot be smoothly advanced.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 1, while the normal game state is being executed, it is assumed that the game property is such that the game is advanced by aiming at the first start opening 54 by left-handing, and the first area arranged in the left side area PA1. When the starting opening 51 is also used as the first winning combination operation gate 91 and the game ball enters the first starting opening 51, at the same time, it means that the first winning combination operation gate 91 has passed (the gaming ball is the first If it is detected by the starting port switch 511, it is also detected by the first combination operation gate switch 911 at the same time). That is, when the game state is the normal game state, the player mainly plays the game in which the game ball is inserted into the first starting opening 51 by left-handing, so the game ball is inserted into the first starting opening 51. If the ball can be made, as a result, it means that the game ball has also passed through the first combination continuous operation gate 91. Therefore, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the big hit (so-called accident hit) is achieved by digesting the operation holding ball (residual holding) of the second special symbol that occurred in the latent probability variation gaming state before the transition. Even if it occurs, by handling the game ball into the first starting opening 51, the game ball is treated as having passed through the first winning combination operation gate 91, so that the big hit game can be started without delay. Can be made. Therefore, when a player who is playing a game with the gaming machine PM ends the game because the gaming state has fallen to the normal state (when the player leaves the gaming machine), sits next When the player starts the game, first he should advance the game by aiming at the first starting opening 51, so if a big hit (so-called accident hit) occurs based on the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol mentioned above. However, by inserting the game ball into the first starting opening 51, the game ball eventually passes through the first winning combination operation gate 91, and accordingly the big hit game is started. Become. Then, if the big hit notification production is performed to notify the occurrence of the big hit at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening (first combination continuous operation gate 91), the player can make the big hit occur without feeling uncomfortable. Can be recognized.

[External information signal]
Next, the external information signal output from the external information terminal board 600 will be described. In the present embodiment, the external information signal output from the external information terminal board 600 as external information to an external device outside the machine includes a big hit signal, a signal during a condominium, a symbol confirmation signal, and the like. It should be noted that this external information signal also includes other signals such as a prize ball signal, a door frame open signal, a magnetic sensor abnormal signal, a disconnection short circuit power supply abnormal signal, and an abnormal sensor detection (abnormal entrance time etc.) signal. However, since it is a known technique, the description thereof will be omitted below.

  The external devices installed outside the gaming machine PM include a data display and a hall computer. The data display is a device that is installed on the upper portion of the gaming machine PM and displays data (game information) regarding the operating state of the gaming machine PM based on an external information signal output from the gaming machine PM. The game information displayed on the data display is useful for the player to select a game machine. The hall computer totals the operating state of each gaming machine (this gaming machine PM is one of them) based on an external information signal output from each gaming machine installed in the hall in the game store, and each gaming machine It is a device that manages the operating status of machines. The hall computer may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM via a data display, or may be electrically connected to the gaming machine PM without a data display.

  Here, as the terms used below, the terms “conditioning device” and “characteristics continuous device” both mean conceptual devices (control devices). The condition device is a device that is a condition for operating the accessory continuous operation device. This condition device is mainly composed of the main control board 100 (main CPU 101), and is a conceptual device that operates when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is confirmed and displayed as a big hit symbol. The accessory continuous operation device is a device that operates when the condition device operates in a model that does not have a combination operation operation gate, and in a model that has a combination operation operation gate, after the condition device operates, It is a device that operates when a game ball enters the winning combination operation gate. The accessory continuous operation device is a conceptual device mainly composed of the main control board 100 (main CPU 101) and for continuously operating the special electric accessory 542.

  FIG. 19 is a time chart of a big hit signal. The big hit signal is an external information signal indicating that the big hit is in progress. Big hit signal, in the state where at least one of the special symbol probability variation function and the special symbol variation time shortening function is operating (a gaming state other than the normal gaming state), a condition for one of the special symbol display devices 71, 72 When the special symbol (big hit symbol) that the device will operate is confirmed and displayed, from the time when the confirmation display time of this special symbol (display time after confirmation) elapses until the operation of the condition device ends Turned on. The fixed display time of the special symbol is set to "0.5 seconds" as described above. The fixed display time of this special symbol is the time during which the special symbol is definitely stopped and displayed (the time when the completely stopped state is held). However, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is not activated, the condition device is activated on the second special symbol display device 72. The second special symbol (big hit symbol) When the condition device operates based on the confirmation display of, the big hit signal is output on from the time the operation of the accessory continuous operation device starts to the end of the operation of the condition device. . That is, when the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit when the game state is the normal game state (low probability low base state), the big hit signal indicates that the second special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped. The output is turned on when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is started, not when the determined display time has elapsed. Here, in the present embodiment, after the condition device is activated, the character continuously operating device starts operating on condition that the game ball has passed the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92, so the big hit signal The output start timing of is dependent on the timing at which the game ball passes through the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92. In this way, during the big hit of the second special symbol in the normal game state, the reason for outputting the big hit signal from the start of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is, as described above, from the advantageous game state to the normal game state. When the player has finished playing the game and the gaming machine PM is in an empty seat by falling, the operation holding ball of the second special symbol is held within the limited period after the player has fallen to the normal gaming state. When the so-called accident big hit occurs by digesting (residual hold that occurred during the advantageous game state), when the big hit signal is output after the fixed display time of the second special symbol has elapsed, the gaming machine PM Based on the game information displayed on the data display of the above, it is revealed in advance that the gaming machine PM is a big hit, and only a specific player who happens to know it is profitable. But It is from Jill.

  FIG. 20 is a time chart of the signals during the condominium. The signal in the condominium is an external information signal indicating that the condominium is in the condominium. The continuous signal is a state (a gaming state other than the normal gaming state) in which at least one of the probability varying function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is operating, in principle, the special symbol display device 71. , 72 the special device will be activated by the special device (big hit symbol) is confirmed, at least the confirmation display time of this special symbol (display time after confirmation) has elapsed since the operation of the condition device Until the end, the output is on (additional period will be described later). However, when the probability variation function of the special symbol is not activated and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is not activated, the condition device is activated on the second special symbol display device 72. The second special symbol (big hit symbol) When the condition device is activated by the confirmation display of, the signal during the condominium is turned on at least from the start of the operation of the accessory continuous operation device to the end of the operation of the condition device ( The additional period will be described later). That is, when the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit when the game state is the normal game state (low-probability low base state), the second signal special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped in the condominium signal. The output is turned on when the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is started, not when the displayed confirmation display time has elapsed. Here, in the present embodiment, after the condition device is operated, the character continuously operating device starts to operate on the condition that the game ball has passed the role operation gates 91 and 92. The output start timing of the middle signal depends on the timing at which the game ball passes through the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92. In this way, during the big hit of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, the reason for outputting the signal during the condominium from the start of the operation of the accessory continuous operating device is from the start of the operation of the accessory continuous operating device. It is the same as the reason for outputting. In addition, the continuous signal, in addition to the above-mentioned period of ON output (in the form of continuous connection with the end of operation of the condition device), as the additional period of the above, the probability variation function of the special symbol or the special symbol While the variable time shortening function is operating, that is, while the advantageous game state (time saving game state, latent probability variation game state, probability variation game state) continues, ON output is performed.

  FIG. 21 is a time chart of the symbol confirmation signal. The symbol determination signal is an external information signal that is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, about 0.1 seconds) each time the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops changing. However, after the probability variation function of the special symbol or the variation time shortening function of the special symbol starts to operate, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops 100 times in total (the number of specified STs), and its confirmation By the time the display time (stop display time) elapses, if the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, the symbol finalization signal is not output on the occasion that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped. . That is, when the game state is an advantageous game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state, latent probability variation game state), the variable display of the second special symbol is the main subject of the game, so the variable display of the first special symbol is The symbol determination signal is not output as an onset when it is stopped, and the symbol determination signal is output as an onset when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. On the other hand, after the probability variation function of the special symbol or the variation time shortening function of the special symbol starts to operate, the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol stops 100 times in total (specified ST times) and is confirmed. Except until the display time (stop display time) elapses, if the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the symbol confirmation signal is output as an opportunity when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. Not done. That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, since the variable display of the first special symbol becomes the main subject of the game, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, and the symbol determination signal is output on. There is no such thing, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, the symbol determination signal is output on. In other words, in the present embodiment, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, depending on the game state of the current stay, the variable display of the special symbol that is the main subject of the game has stopped , The symbol confirmation signal is output on.

  As a modification thereof, in the case of forcibly stopping the variable display of the other special symbol, when the jackpot variable display of one of the special symbols is stopped among the first special symbol and the second special symbol , May be configured not to output the symbol determination signal ON when the variable display of the other special symbol is forcibly stopped. That is, in the above embodiment, as described above, when the game state is the advantageous game state (time saving game state, probability variation game state, latent probability variation game state), the variable display of the second special symbol is the main subject of the game. , When the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, the symbol confirmation signal is not output on, and when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the symbol determination signal is output on However, for example, as the above simultaneous variation process (variation forced stop process), the big hit variation display of the first special symbol and the small hit variation display or the outlying variation display of the second special symbol are simultaneously performed. In the state, when the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is stopped first, almost simultaneously with that, when the small hit variation display or the outlying variation display of the second special symbol is forcibly stopped, the When the small hit variation display or outlying variation display of the special symbol is forcibly stopped, the symbol determination signal is not turned on, and when the large hit variation display of the first special symbol is stopped, the symbol determination signal May be configured to be output. Further, as another modification, in the time saving game state (low probability high base state) in which the electric choo support function operates for a predetermined number of times of fluctuation display, the first starting port 51 is configured as an ordinary electric accessory (electric chew). If the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the symbol confirmation signal is not turned on when the second special symbol is changed, and if the second starting opening 52 is configured as an ordinary electric accessory (electricity chew), the first The symbol confirmation signal may not be turned on when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped.

<Processing on the main control board side>
Next, the procedure of operation processing in the main control board 100 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. The processing on the main control board 100 side is configured to include a main control side main processing and a main control side timer interrupt processing.

<Main processing on the main control side>
22 to 23 are flowcharts showing main processing on the main control side of the main control board 100. In the main processing on the main control side, after the security check of the main CPU 101 is performed by resetting when the power is turned on, the program starts and the processing of S1 and thereafter is started.

  First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, a start address is set in the stack pointer as an initial value of the stack area (S1), and access to the RAM 103 is permitted (S2). Then, the vector table storing the start address of the program to be processed when the timer interrupt occurs is set (S3), and the initial value is set in the internal register of the main CPU 101 (S4).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5). When the RAM clear switch is turned on (S5: YES), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero in S9, which will be described later. On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch is not turned on (S5: NO), the value of the power-off information flag is read and it is determined whether or not the power-off normal information is stored (S6).

  Here, when the information indicating that the power is cut off is stored (S6: YES), a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area of the RAM 103 (S7). Then, it is determined whether or not this checksum is 0, that is, whether or not the checksum is normal (S8). Note that the power-on checksum calculated here includes the complement of the checksum calculated in the power-off processing described below, so if the backup was successful, the power-on checksum will be checked. Sam becomes "0". In this way, it is determined when the power is turned on whether the information stored in the RAM 103 before the power is turned off is properly backed up. At this time, if the checksum is normal (S8: YES), the process proceeds to S12, which will be described later, in order to return to the state before the power was cut off. On the other hand, if the checksum is abnormal (S8: NO), the entire area of the RAM 103 is cleared to zero (S9). Next, initialization data at power-on is set in the RAM 103 (S10). Then, in order to initialize the effect display device 70 and the effect lamp LP, a request for an effect control command (“effect initial command”) to the effect control board 200 is made (S11).

  Next, in the power-off recovery setting process, setting of power-on normal information, initial setting of various errors, and communication initial setting with the payout control board 400 are sequentially performed in the RAM 103 (S12). Here, as the setting of the power-on normal information, in order to save that the power-on is correctly performed, the power-on normal data is stored in the power-off information flag, and the power-off occurrence information is initialized. Turn off the power-off confirmation flag. Next, the data transfer source address, the data transfer destination address, and the transfer byte number are set, and the data for the transfer byte number is transferred (S13). Then, the value of the special symbol game status at the time of power off is read, and power off recovery processing relating to the special symbol game is performed (S14).

  Then, the main control board 100 and the effect control board 200 are requested to transmit an effect control command (“power off recovery command”) at the time of power off recovery (S15). This power-off recovery command includes information regarding the inspection of the communication line, the operating state of the special symbol, the number of times of probability variation, the number of times of shortening, the number of times of easy entry, variation pattern selection state, and error state. It should be noted that the command request for the untransmitted portion before the power is turned off is cleared. Next, in the symbol memory number command request process, the information of the operation-retaining ball numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol at the time of power-off is read, and the effect control command including the information of the operation-retaining ball number is requested ( S16).

  Then, the reset setting for returning the ordinary electric accessory 522 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the second starting port 52 is opened) is performed (S17). Further, the reset setting for returning the special electric accessory 542 to the state before the power is turned off (for example, the special winning opening 54 is opened) is performed (S18). Then, the value of the probability variation flag is read, and the operating state of the probability varying function of the special symbol when the power is turned off is set (S19). The probability variation flag is a flag for setting the operating probability (high probability or low probability) of the special symbol game (a flag indicating that the probability varying function of the special symbol is operating). Next, in order to activate the timer interrupt, a predetermined count value is set as the initial setting of the CTC circuit of the main control microcomputer 110, and the timer interrupt is generated every 4 ms (S20). Then, interrupt inhibition is set to inhibit the occurrence of timer interrupt processing (S21). Then, as a preparation for restarting the watchdog timer, clear word 1 (“55H”) is set (S22).

  Next, in order to determine the occurrence of power failure, the value of the power failure confirmation flag is read and it is determined whether power failure has occurred (S23). If the power is not cut off, the initial value random number updating process is executed (S24). In this initial value random number update processing, in this initial value random number update processing, normal symbol per initial value random number, special symbol per soft initial value random number and special symbol per symbol initial value random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0".

  Next, the interrupt permission is set to permit the generation of the timer interrupt process (S25), the process returns to the process of inhibiting the interrupt (S21), and the loop processes of S21 to S25 are repeatedly executed. Here, the timer interrupt process is executed periodically in a predetermined cycle, but the remaining time from the completion of the previous interrupt process to the occurrence of the next interrupt process is used to execute S21 to S25. Repeat the process up to. Then, if there is an interrupt request in the interrupt disabled state, the timer interrupt process is started when the interrupt is permitted in S25. On the other hand, if the power-off confirmation flag is turned on in S23, that is, if the power-off has occurred, the process proceeds to S26 and the power-off time process described below is executed.

  Next, as the power-off processing (S26 to S32), first, clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (S26). Next, it is determined whether the content of the power-off information flag is power-on normal data (S27). If it is the power-on normal information (S27: Yes), the power-off normal data is set in the power-off information flag (S28). On the other hand, when the power-on information is not normal (S27: No), power-off abnormal data is set in the power-off information flag (S29), and the process proceeds to S32.

  Next, a checksum is calculated for a predetermined area (excluding the checksum area) of the RAM 103 (S30). Then, the complement of the checksum data is calculated, and the result value of this complement is set in the checksum area of the RAM 103 (S31). Then, the access prohibition setting of the RAM 103 is set (S32), and the process is looped until the power is turned off.

<Main control timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control side timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100 will be described. FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing of the main control board 100. The timer interrupt process is started by a clock pulse from the CTC circuit of the game control microcomputer 110 at fixed time intervals (for example, 4 ms), and is executed by interrupting the main control side main process.

  First, when this timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the register in the main CPU 101 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 103, and then the interrupt operation condition is set (S51).

  Next, clear word 2 (“AAH”) is set to restart the watchdog timer (S52). At this time, the clear word 1 and the clear word 2 are sequentially written in the WDT clear register of the CPU 101 within a preset time-out time, whereby the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted. That is, when the main CPU 101 is executing the program normally, the clear words 1 and 2 are set periodically, so that the watchdog timer is cleared and restarted before it times out. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Next, the input process is executed (S53). In this input process, information of switches other than the RAM clear switch is read as various switches connected to the main control board 100. That is, the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the special winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, 641, the door opening switch, the frame opening switch, the back set opening switch, the magnetic sensor. , The radio wave sensor, etc. are read, the state of them is judged, and then the detected information is stored.

  Next, various random number update processing is executed (S54). In this various random number update processing, the normal symbol variation pattern random number and the special symbol variation pattern random number are updated. For the normal symbol variation pattern random number, the value of the random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to "0" which is the minimum value. On the other hand, for the special symbol variation pattern random number, a predetermined value (eg 3511) is subtracted from the previous random number. If the subtracted result is less than 0, a predetermined value (eg, 50,000) is added to the subtracted result.

  Next, an initial value updating type random number updating process is executed (S55). In this initial value update type random number update process, the random number per normal symbol, the soft random number per special symbol and the symbol random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0". Further, when the value of the counter makes one round, the value of the corresponding initial value random number is set as the initial value.

  Next, the initial value random number updating process is executed (S56). In this initial value random number updating process, the initial value random number per normal symbol, the soft initial value random number per special symbol and the symbol initial value random number per special symbol are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value "0".

  Next, a timer subtraction process is executed (S57). In this timer subtraction process, the values of various timers used for controlling the game operation of the pachinko gaming machine PM are subtracted and updated. For example, the value of each timer is subtracted for each interrupt period (4 ms in this example). The various timers include a special symbol game timer for managing the time (variation time, fixed display time) relating to variable display and stop display by the special symbol display devices 71 and 72, and the like. In the special symbol game timer, a prescribed variable time is set at the start of the variable display of the special symbol, and is subtracted as the time elapses. In the first special symbol and the second special symbol, during the variable display of one special symbol, if the small hit game of the other special symbol is executed, while the small hit game is being executed, one The time for the variable display of the special symbol is interrupted.

  Next, the second starting opening valid period setting process is executed (S58). In the second starting opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the second starting port 51 are determined, and the valid period data or invalid period data of the second starting port 51 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a prize monitoring process is executed (S59). In this winning prize monitoring processing, the first starting opening switch 511, the second starting opening switch 521, the operation gate switch 531, the special winning opening switch 541, the general winning opening switch 611, and the winning combination operation gate switch in the input processing (S53). Based on the detection information of 911, 921, a switch passage inspection of the game ball is performed, and as a result, when it is determined that the game ball has passed each switch, the information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch is stored in the main information. The game information is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the means 180, and a request for transmission of a production control command including information indicating that the game ball has passed each switch is made. The details of the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, prize ball control processing is executed (S60). In this prize ball control process, a payout control command is transmitted to the payout control substrate 400 to instruct the number of prize balls corresponding to the prize type based on the detection result in the prize monitoring process, and the payout control substrate 400 is also sent. The communication data with the payout control board 400 is inspected by monitoring the received data from.

  Next, the normal symbol operation gate monitoring process is executed (S61). In this normal symbol operation gate monitoring process, the passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is monitored, and when it is determined that the game gate 53 is passed, the random number related to the normal symbol lottery is acquired as the operation reserve ball information. , The number of operation-holding balls is updated up to a maximum of four, and the random number related to the ordinary symbol lottery is stored.

  Next, the normal symbol control process is executed (S62). In this normal symbol control processing, in order to perform a series of processing related to the normal symbol display device 75 or the normal electric accessory 522, depending on the value of the normal symbol game status, the normal symbol changing process, the normal symbol stop symbol displaying process , Normal electric auditors product operating process, normal electric auditors product operating end demonstration process, etc. are executed. In the normal symbol changing process, the display pattern number data of the normal symbol is created (updated) in order to display the normal symbol in a variable display or a fixed display.

  Next, normal symbol fluctuation start monitoring processing is executed (S63). In this normal symbol variation start monitoring process, the operating state of the ordinary symbol is monitored, and when it is determined that the variation start condition of the ordinary symbol is satisfied, the ordinary symbol operation holding ball number is consumed one, and the ordinary symbol Success / failure determination, symbol determination, variation pattern determination, variation time setting, and the like are performed in order.

  Next, the starting port monitoring control process is executed (S64). In this start opening monitoring control process, the winning of the game ball to the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 is monitored, and if there is a winning of the game ball, the number of reserved balls is updated and the special symbol lottery is involved. Random number storage, pre-reading notice effect determination, command request for the number of symbols stored, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, a special symbol control process is executed (S65). In this special symbol control process, as a series of processes related to the special symbol display devices 71, 72, depending on the value of the special symbol game status, a special symbol variation start process (S420) and a special symbol variation process (S430) which will be described later in detail. ), Special symbol stop symbol displaying process (S440), etc. are executed.

  Next, the special electric auditors product control process is executed (S66). In this process, when the special symbol lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”, the operation start and end of operation of the special electric auditors product 542 are set as the operation processing related to the special electric auditors product 542, and are set to be large. The opening time and the number of times of opening the winning opening 54 are updated, the operation start setting of the probability variation function, the operation start setting of the variation time shortening function, the variation pattern selection state, etc. are sequentially executed.

  Next, a special winning opening valid period setting process is executed (S67). In this special winning opening valid period setting process, the winning valid period and the winning invalid period of the special winning port 54 are determined, and the valid period data or the invalid period data of the special winning port 54 is set as the determination result.

  Next, a special symbol variation start monitoring control process is executed (S68). In this special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing, if there is an operation holding ball of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, one reserve ball number is consumed, the command request of the symbol memory number, the judgment of the special symbol , The symbol determination of the special symbol, the determination of the probability variation function, the determination of the time reduction function, the setting of the operation pattern of the special electric auditors, the setting of the demonstration effect time, etc. are performed in order.

  Next, abnormality detection processing is executed (S69). In this abnormality detection processing, based on the input information in the input processing (S53), the magnetic detection signal by the magnetic sensor, the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality signal, the radio detection signal by the radio sensor, the door / frame opening signal, etc. are sequentially inspected. , It is determined whether the gaming machine is in an error state. In the case of an error state, in order to request the production control board 200 to display an error, a production control command including the error information (“error production designation command”) is generated.

  Next, a ball passing time abnormality detection process is executed (S70). In this ball-passing time abnormality detection processing, when the ON signal of the winning detection switch is continuously detected for a predetermined time or more, a ball-passing time abnormality is set and an effect control command (“error Performance request command ”) and a security signal output request for output to an external terminal.

  Next, a game state display process is executed (S71). In this game state display processing, display data such as the number of times the special electric auditors product 542 operates continuously (the number of specified rounds), the number of operation-reserved balls of ordinary symbols and special symbols, and the like are created. Further, the display data for displaying the information on the error state detected by the abnormality detection process on the state indicator lamp of the main control board 100 is created.

  Next, the LED output process is executed (S72). In this LED output process, the special symbol control process (S65), in order to display the special symbol and the normal symbol, the number of reserved balls, the number of times the special electric auditors operate continuously, the error, and the like. The display data created by the abnormality detection process (S69), the game state display process (S71), etc., the special symbol display devices 71, 72, the normal symbol display device 75, the special symbol holding lamps 73, 74, the universal symbol hold It outputs to the lamp 76, the status display lamp of the main control board 100, etc., and initializes the display in these various display devices.

  Next, a firing control signal output process is executed (S73). In this launch control signal output process, when the communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or the disconnection short circuit power source abnormality is not detected, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control board 400 to permit the launch of the game ball. To do. On the other hand, when the communication abnormality with the payout control board 400 or the disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality is detected, a launch prohibition signal is output to the payout control board 400 to inhibit the launch of the game ball.

  Next, the solenoid output process is executed (S74). In this solenoid output process, in order to operate each electric accessory 542, the normal symbol control process (S62) and the special electric accessory control process (S66) are acquired. An excitation signal is output to each electric accessory solenoid 623, 643 based on the control data.

  Next, production control command transmission processing is executed (S75). In this effect control command transmission process, the effect control command designated by the pointer is read out from the effect control commands stored in the command storage area (ring buffer) of the main information storage unit 180 in the above process, and this effect is generated. A control command is transmitted to the production control board 200.

  Next, external information output processing is executed (S76). In this external information output processing, the game information related to the gaming machine PM is output as an external information signal to an external device such as a hall computer via the external information terminal board 600. As the external information signal, for example, a prize ball signal, a door frame opening signal, a magnetic sensor abnormality signal, a disconnection short-circuit power supply abnormality signal, an abnormality sensor detection (abnormal entry time, etc.) signal, a big hit signal, a signal during the condominium, There is a symbol confirmation signal.

  Next, the saved contents of the register are restored and the main CPU 101 is set to the interrupt enable state (S77). As a result, the main control side timer interrupt process is terminated, the process returns to the main control side main process, and the main control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

  When the main control board 100 detects a power failure (a decrease in the supply voltage based on a predetermined threshold) during main processing on the main control side or during interrupt processing, a non-maskable interrupt is generated and the power failure confirmation flag is turned on. To do. Then, after returning to the original processing, the above-described power-off processing (S26 to S32) is executed.

≪Winning monitoring process≫
Next, the winning monitoring process (S59) will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the details of the prize winning monitoring process (S59).

  First, the first starting opening switch input processing is executed (S101). In the first starting port switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511 is input. When the detection signal from the first starting port switch 511 is input, the first starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting port 51 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage unit 180. In addition to being stored, the first start opening winning command is generated and is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the first starting port switch 511, the process directly proceeds to the next step.

  Subsequently, the second starting opening switch input processing is executed (S102). In the second starting port switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 is input. When the detection signal from the second starting port switch 521 is input, the second starting port winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting port 52 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage unit 180. In addition to being stored, the second start opening winning command is generated and is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the second starting port switch 521, the process directly proceeds to the next step.

  Next, the operation gate switch input process is executed (S103). In the operation gate switch input process, it is determined whether the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531 is input. When the detection signal from the operation gate switch 531 is input, the operation gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed through the operation gate 53 is temporarily stored in the winning information storage area of the main information storage means 180, and the operation gate winning is performed. A command is generated and is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the operation gate switch 531, the process directly proceeds to the next step.

  Then, a combination operation operation gate switch input process is executed (S104). In the winning combination operation gate switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signals from the winning combination operation gate switches 911 and 921 are input. When the detection signal from the winning combination operation gate switch 911, 921 is input, winning combination operation gate winning data indicating that the game ball has passed through the winning combination operation gate 911, 921 is stored in the winning information of the main information storage means 180. The combination operation gate passing flag is turned on at the same time, and the combination operation gate winning command is generated and is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the combination operation operation gate switches 911 and 921, the process directly proceeds to the next step.

  Subsequently, a special winning opening switch input process is executed (S105). In the special winning opening switch input processing, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the special winning opening switch 541 is input. When the detection signal from the special winning opening switch 541 is inputted, the special winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the big winning opening 54 is temporarily stored in the winning information storing area of the main information storing means 180. , A special winning opening winning command is generated and is temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. On the other hand, if there is no detection signal input from the special winning opening switch 541, the process directly proceeds to the next step.

  Then, a general winning opening switch process is executed (S106). In the general winning opening switch input processing, it is determined whether or not the detection signal from the general winning opening switch 611 is input. When the detection signal from the general winning opening switch 611 is input, the general winning opening winning data indicating that the game ball has entered the general winning openings 61 to 63 is temporarily stored in the winning data storage area of the main information storage means 180. At the same time, a general prize winning command is generated and temporarily stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180. On the other hand, if there is no input of the detection signal from the general winning opening switch 611, the present winning monitoring processing is ended.

≪Special symbol game processing≫
Next, a series of processes relating to the special symbol game in the main control side timer interrupt process will be described. In the processing related to the special symbol game, the above-mentioned starting opening monitoring control processing (S64), special symbol control processing (S65), special electric auditors product control processing (S66), special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing (S68), etc. Is applicable.

(Starting port monitoring control process)
First, the starting port monitoring control process (S64) will be described. FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing details of the starting port monitoring control process (S64).

  First, it is determined whether or not a winning game for the first start opening 51 has been detected (S201). When the winning to the first starting opening 51 is detected (S201: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation reserved balls of the first special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S202).

  If the number of operation reserve balls of the first special symbol is less than 4 (S202: YES), as a random number value related to the first special symbol game, a random value per special symbol, a random symbol value per special symbol, a special symbol Fluctuating pattern random number value is acquired, and each random number value is stored in the first special symbol holding storage area (holding n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 according to the order of entering balls (S203). Then, as an update of the operation reserved sphere number of the first special symbol, the value of the first special symbol reserved sphere counter is incremented by 1 (S204), and the winning check of the first starting opening 51 is completed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the game winning of the second starting opening 52 is detected (S205). When the winning in the second starting opening 52 is detected (S205: YES), it is determined whether the number of operation reserved balls of the second special symbol is less than the upper limit number of 4 (S206). If the number of operation reserve balls of the second special symbol is less than 4 (S206: YES), as a random number value related to the second special symbol game, a random number value per special symbol, a random symbol value per special symbol, a special symbol Fluctuating pattern random number value is acquired, and each random number value is stored in the second special symbol reserved storage area (reserved n storage area) of the main information storage means 180 in accordance with the entering order (S207). Then, as an update of the operation reserved sphere number of the second special symbol, the value of the second special symbol reserved sphere counter is incremented by 1 (S208), and the winning check of the second starting opening 52 is completed.

  Then, whether or not there is an update of the operation pending ball number of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, that is, whether the operation pending ball number of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is added in S204 or S208 It is determined (S209). If there is an update of the number of operation reserve balls (S209: YES), a symbol memory number command including information on the number of operation reserve balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is generated, and this is the main information storage means. The data is stored in the command storage area 180 (S210).

  Next, the state of the gaming machine is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not it is the pre-determination timing (S211). If it is the pre-determination timing (S211: YES), in order to generate the pre-reading determination information based on the various random numbers acquired at the time of winning the start mouth, the special symbol hit random from the hit random number buffer (holding n storage area or register). A numerical value is read out and a prior determination is made as to whether or not it is true (S212). Then, a win / fail pre-determination command including the information of this pre-judgment result (win / fail pre-judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S213).

  Further, the special symbol hit symbol random number value is read from the hit symbol random number buffer, and symbol preliminary determination is performed (S214). Then, a symbol advance determination command including the information of this advance determination result (symbol advance determination number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S215). Furthermore, the special pattern variation pattern random number value is read from the variation pattern random number buffer, and variation pattern pre-determination is performed (S216). Then, a fluctuation pattern preliminary judgment command including the information of this preliminary judgment result (fluctuation pattern preliminary judgment number) is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S217).

(Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring control processing)
Next, the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68) will be described. FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68).

  In this special symbol variation start monitoring control process (S68), of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol variation start monitoring process, which will be described later, for the special symbol side that satisfies the variation start condition. (S305, S309) is executed. In addition, when both the first special symbol and the second special symbol satisfy the variation start condition, as described above, the special symbol variation start monitoring process for both the first special symbol and the second special symbol ( S305 and S309) are executed in parallel.

  First, it is determined whether a big hit or a small hit is in progress (S301). Then, whether or not the first special symbol is waiting for variation, that is, whether the first special symbol game status is "00H (waiting for variation)" is determined (S302). If the first special symbol is waiting for fluctuation (S302: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol is "0" (S303). If the number of operation holding balls of the first special symbol is not "0" (S303: NO), that is, if the operation holding ball of the first special symbol exists, the variation start condition of the first special symbol is satisfied. Assuming that the first special symbol variation start monitoring table addresses (addresses of various tables and RAM storage areas used in the subsequent processing) are set (S305), special on the first special symbol side The process proceeds to the symbol variation start monitoring process (S310).

  Subsequently, whether or not the second special symbol is waiting for fluctuation, that is, whether or not the second special symbol game status is "00H (waiting for fluctuation)" is determined (S306). When the second special symbol is waiting for fluctuation (S306: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol is "0" (S307). If the number of operation holding balls of the second special symbol is not "0" (S307: NO), that is, if the operation holding ball of the second special symbol exists, the variation start condition of the second special symbol is satisfied. Assuming that the second special symbol variation start monitoring table addresses (addresses of various tables and RAM storage areas used in the subsequent processing) are set (S308), special on the first special symbol side The process proceeds to the symbol variation start monitoring process (S309). Details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the variation start conditions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol are not both satisfied (S301: YES, S302: NO, S306: NO, S307: YES), the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305). , S309) is skipped.

(Special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process)
Next, the special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S305, S309) will be described. FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start monitoring process (S305, S309).

  In this special symbol fluctuation start monitoring process (S305, S309), referring to the first special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table or the second special symbol fluctuation start monitoring table set in S304 or S308, the fluctuation start of this time The target special symbol side will be executed, but the method of processing is the same between the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, except for special cases, on the first special symbol side. Whether it is a process or a process on the side of the second special symbol will be collectively described without making a distinction.

  First, 1 is subtracted from the number of operation holding balls on the side of the special symbol which is the target of the fluctuation start this time (S311). Then, a symbol storage number command including information on the number of operation-reserved balls of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after subtraction is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage means 180 (S312). Subsequently, the special symbol holding storage area on the special symbol side which is the target of the variation start this time is accessed, and the random number per special symbol stored in the earliest holding storage area (holding 1 storage area), per special symbol The symbol random number value and the special symbol variation pattern random number value are sequentially read, and these random number values are used for a special symbol validity determination process (S320), a symbol determination process (S330), and a variation pattern selection process (S423), which will be described later. It is transferred to the special symbol appropriateness determination area, the special symbol determination area, and the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S313). Further, as an update of the pending storage area, the pending ball information stored in the pending 2 storage area to the pending 4 storage area is shifted to a lower pending storage area, and the pending 4 storage area is cleared to zero (S314).

  Then, the special symbol winning / discarding determination process is executed (S320). In the special symbol win / loss determination process (S320), first, the special symbol win / loss table is acquired. At this time, if the gaming state is the special symbol probability changing state, a high probability win / loss table is acquired, and if the game state is a normal state, a low probability win / loss table is acquired. Then, the random number per special symbol is read from the special symbol appropriateness determination area of the main information storage unit 180. Then, with reference to the special symbol win / loss lottery table, based on the random number per special symbol, the win / fail judgment of the special symbol is executed. Further, a value (big hit data “55H”, small hit data “33H”, deviating data “00H”) corresponding to the result of the hit determination is stored in the special symbol judgment flag of the main information storage unit 180.

  Then, a symbol determination process is executed (S330). In the symbol determination process (S330), the stop symbol of the special symbol and the character effect number (variation-added symbol information) are determined according to the result of the hit / miss determination. Then, the special symbol stop symbol (symbol group) determined this time and the character effect number are stored in the symbol storage area of the main information storage unit 180. In addition, the character effect number, the type of the determined stop symbol (symbol group), and the operating state of the probability variation function of the special symbol and the regular symbol (the special symbol probability change on / special symbol probability change off / normal symbol probability change on) / 4 patterns of normal variation off of normal pattern)) and the combination. It should be noted that if the result of the hit / miss determination is out of alignment, the character effect number “0” is determined.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the result of the special symbol hit determination is a small hit (S341), and it is determined whether the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit (S342). If the result of the special symbol hit determination is a small hit (S341: YES), the process proceeds to S349, and if the result of the special symbol hit determination is out (S341: NO, S342: NO), go to S351. Transition.

  When the result of the determination result of the special symbol is a big hit (S341: NO, S342: YES), it is determined whether the determination data of the other special symbol is the big hit data (big hit data "55H") ( S343). If the win / failure determination data of the other special symbol is the big hit data (S343: YES), the result of the win / fail determination of the special symbol derived in S320 above is “out” from the “big hit” in order to prohibit duplication of the big hit. , And the process proceeds to S351.

  Next, based on the type of the symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, the probability variation number is determined as the number of times the probability variation function of the special symbol operates after the big hit game is finished. Yes (S345). Further, based on the type of the symbol group determined in the above S330 (big hit type) and the gaming state at the time of big hit winning, as the number of times the variable time shortening function of the special symbol operates after the end of the big hit game, the variable time shortening count Is determined (S346). Furthermore, based on the type of symbol group (big hit type) determined in S330 and the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit, the number of easy entry states is determined as the number of times the electric-chu support function is activated after the big hit game ends. Yes (S347). The determination results (probability change count, change time reduction count, easy entry state count) are stored in the time saving count storage area and easy entry state count storage area of the main information storage unit 180. Then, the operation pattern of the special electric auditors product 542 during the big hit game (round game) is set based on the type (big hit type) of the symbol group determined in S330 (S348). Specifically, as the operation pattern of the special electric accessory 542, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening pattern (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in each round, and the like are set.

  Next, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330 and the current game state, the variation pattern selection state after the big hit game end or the small hit game is set (S349). Then, based on the type of symbol group determined in S330, the demonstration effect time (hit start demo time and hit end demo time) of the special game (big hit game or small hit game) is set (S350). Then, the special symbol appropriateness determination area and the special symbol determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used in the special symbol appropriateness determination processing (S320) and the symbol determination processing (S330) are cleared (S351). Then, the special symbol game status on the special symbol side to be changed this time is transited from "00H (standby)" to "01H (variation start)" (S352).

(Special symbol control processing)
Next, the special symbol control process (S65) will be described. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control process (S65).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special electric auditors product 542 is not in operation, that is, whether the special electric auditors product game status is "00H (waiting for hit)" (S401). If the special electric auditors product 542 is not in operation (S401: YES), it is determined whether the first special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402). If the first special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S402: YES), to execute the process related to the first special symbol, the first special symbol control table (used in the subsequent process Addresses of various tables and RAM storage area) are set (S403), and special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404) is performed. On the other hand, if the first special symbol game status is "00H (standby)" (S402: NO), it is determined whether the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S405). ). If the second special symbol game status is not "00H (standby)" (S405: YES), to execute the process related to the second special symbol, the second special symbol control table (used in the subsequent process Addresses of various tables and RAM storage area) are set (S406), and special symbol control general-purpose processing (S407) is performed.

  In the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407), using the first special symbol control table or the second special symbol control table set in the above S403 or S406, the special symbol that is the target of this change Although the process of the side will be executed, since the method of processing is common between the first special symbol side and the second special symbol side, unless otherwise specified, is it the process of the first special symbol side, It will be collectively described without distinguishing whether it is the process on the second special symbol side. Details of this special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407) will be described later with reference to FIG.

(Special symbol control general-purpose processing)
Then, special symbol control general-purpose processing is executed (S404, S407). Here, FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol control general-purpose processing (S404, S407).

  In this special symbol control general-purpose process (S404, S407), the branch process (S411-S414) for shifting to the process according to the value ("01H", "02H", "03H") of the special symbol game status is executed. To do. First, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status on the special symbol side that is the target of the change this time is not 0 (S411). If the special symbol game status is not "00H" (S411: YES), it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "01H (start of fluctuation)" (S412). If the special symbol game status is "01H" (S412: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol variation start process (S420). Details of this special symbol variation start processing (S420) will be described later with reference to FIG. On the other hand, if NO in S412, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "02H (changing)" (S413). If the special symbol game status is "02H" (S413: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol changing process (S430). Details of this special symbol changing process (S430) will be described later with reference to FIG. In the case of NO in S413, it is determined whether or not the special symbol game status is "03H (during symbol display)" (S414). If the special symbol game status is "03H" (S414: YES), the process proceeds to the special symbol stop symbol displaying process (S440). Details of the special symbol stop symbol displaying process (S440) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 33 to 34.

(Special symbol fluctuation start processing)
Next, the special symbol variation start process (S420) will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol variation start process (S420).

  First, the special symbol variation pattern table is acquired based on the result of the winning / disapproval lottery and the variation pattern selection state (S421). Then, the special symbol variation pattern random number value is read from the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 (S422). Then, referring to the special symbol variation pattern table, based on the special symbol variation pattern random value, one is selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns (S423).

  Next, the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern selected this time is set (S424). Then, as the setting of the variation start of the special symbol, the variation time is stored in the special symbol game timer of the symbol display control means 165 (S425), and the variation start command to the effect control board 200 is generated (S426). As the variation start command, in order to start the symbol variation effect in the effect display device 70, a communication inspection command, a variation additional symbol information designation command, a variation pattern designation command, a symbol designation command are sequentially generated, and this is the main information storage means. This is stored in the command storage area 180.

  Then, the contents of the special symbol variation pattern determination area of the main information storage unit 180 used for determining the variation pattern are cleared (S427). Then, the special symbol game status is transited from "01H (starting fluctuation)" to "02H (changing)" (S428).

(Processing during special symbol fluctuation)
Next, the special symbol changing process (S430) will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing details of the special symbol changing process (S430).

  First, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation interruption flag is on (S430). The "variation interruption flag" is a flag indicating that the small hit game is being executed as the other special symbol game. If the fluctuation interruption flag is off (S430: NO), that is, if the small hit game is not being executed as the other special symbol game, in order to perform variable display of the special symbol, the changing display pattern number switching process is performed. It executes (S431). In the changing display pattern number switching process (S431), the display pattern number data during the variable display or the stop display of the special symbol is generated every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) so that the special symbol is variably displayed or confirmed.

  On the other hand, if the changing flag is on (S430: YES), that is, if the small hit game is being executed as the other special symbol game, the variable display of the special symbol to be processed is suspended, so the variation is suspended. A middle display pattern number switching process is executed (S432). In the display pattern number switching process during fluctuation change (S432), the display pattern number data during the change display of the special symbol is generated every predetermined switching time. This display pattern number data is output to the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 in the LED output process (S73) in order to suspend the variable display of the special symbol.

  Then, whether or not the special symbol game timer has become "0 (timeout)", that is, whether or not the variation time of the special symbol has ended (S433). When the variation time of the special symbol is over (S433: YES), the stop symbol of the special symbol to be confirmed and displayed on the first special symbol display device 71 or the second special symbol display device 72 is set (S434).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the special symbol hit determination data set in S320 is big hit data (S435). When the hit determination data is big hit data (S435: YES), it is determined whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S436). When the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S436: YES), the variable display of the other special symbol is forced even before the variation time of the other special symbol reaches the prescribed variation time. To end (S437). That is, the variation display of the other out or small hit is forcibly stopped at the out symbol. Then, a variation stop command for instructing the effect control board 200 to confirm and display the decorative pattern is generated, and this is stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 (S438).

  Next, "500 (ms)" is stored as the confirmed display time in the special symbol game timer (S439). The "confirmed display time" is the time during which the stop symbols are definitely stopped and displayed when the special symbols are changed and stopped. Then, the special symbol game status is changed from "02H (during change)" to "03H (during symbol display)" (S440).

(Special symbol stop symbol display processing)
Next, the special symbol stop symbol displaying process (S440) will be described. 33 to 34 are flowcharts showing details of the special symbol stop symbol displaying process (S440).

  First, whether or not the special symbol game timer has become “0 (timeout)”, that is, whether or not the confirmed display time of the special symbol (stop symbol) has ended (S441). Here, when the fixed display time of the special symbol is over (S441: YES), the special symbol game status is changed from "03H (displaying stopped symbol)" to "00H (standby)" (S442).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hit / miss determination data stored in the special symbol determination flag of the main information storage unit 180 is the big hit data “55H” (S443). If the hit determination data is a big hit data (S443: YES), the probability variation function of the special symbol is deactivated (S444), the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is deactivated (S445), and the electric choo support function is activated. Stop (S446) is performed in order. Specifically, the probability variation flag is set to "00H (OFF)", and the probability variation number counter, the variation time reduction number counter, and the easy entry state number counter are also set to "00H" to clear to zero.

  Next, as the start demonstration setting process of the special game, the start demonstration display time is set and a production control command (big hit start demo command) for instructing the start of the start demonstration production is generated (S447). Then, the number of executions of the variation pattern selection state (variation pattern selection state number counter) is cleared to zero (S448). In addition, the special electric auditors game game status is changed from "00H (waiting for hit)" to "01H (special game)" (S449). Then, "00H" is set to clear the contents of the hit / miss determination flag (S450).

  On the other hand, if the hit determination data is not the big hit data (S443: NO), it is determined whether the probability varying function of the special symbol is in operation (S451). If the probability variation function of the special symbol is operating (S451: YES), the probability variation number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as the digested amount of the variation number of the special symbol this time (step S452). . Then, it is determined whether or not the probability variation counter is zero (step S453). If the probability variation counter is zero (S453: YES), the operation of the probability variation function of the special symbol is stopped (S454). When the probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (S453: NO), S454 is skipped and the process proceeds to S455.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time reduction function is in operation (S455). When the variation time reduction function of the special symbol is in operation (S455: YES), the hour / hour counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 as the amount of variation of the variation number of the special symbol this time (step S456). . Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the hour / hour counter is zero (step S457). When the hour / hour counter is zero (S457: YES), it is determined that the number of times of ending the special symbol time saving state has been reached, and the operation of the variable time reduction function of the special symbol is stopped (S458). If the hour / hour counter after subtraction is not zero (S457: NO), S458 is skipped and the process proceeds to S459.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the power cable support function is operating (S459). If the power-chu support function is operating (S459: YES), 1 is subtracted from the easy entry state counter of the main information storage unit 180 as the amount of change in the number of times of change of the special symbol this time (step S460). . Then, it is determined whether or not the easy-ball-in state count counter is zero (step S461). If the easy-ball-in state count counter is zero (S461: YES), it is determined that the number of times the easy-ball-in state has ended has been reached, and the operation of the electric choo support function is stopped (S462). If the number-of-easy-to-enter state counter after subtraction is not zero (S461: NO), S462 is skipped and the process proceeds to S463.

  Next, the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180 is decremented by 1 (S463). Then, the variation pattern selection state is updated (S464). Specifically, by referring to the variation pattern selection state number counter of the main information storage unit 180, it is determined whether or not the number of executions of the current variation pattern selection state has reached a preset end number, and the end number is determined. When it has reached, it switches to the fluctuation pattern selection state defined next. On the other hand, if the number of terminations has not been reached, the current variation pattern selection state is maintained.

  Next, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the current game state information and variation pattern selection state information updated in S451 to S464 is generated, and this is generated in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180. (S465). On the side of the effect control board 200, the effect mode is set and updated based on the information of the game state designation command.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the small hit data "33H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466). When the small hit data is stored (S466: YES), it is determined whether or not the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S467). When the other special symbol is being variably displayed (S467: YES), the variation interruption flag set in the main information storage unit 180 is turned on (S468). In other words, the variation interruption flag is turned on in order to interrupt the variable display of the other special symbol, when the small hit game is executed for the special symbol which is the target of this processing. If the other special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner (S467: NO), S468 is skipped.

  Next, as a start demo setting process for the small hit game, the start demo display time is set, and an effect control command (small hit start demo command) for instructing the start of the start demo effect is generated (S469). Then, the special electric accessory game game status is changed from "00H (waiting for hit)" to "02H (small hit game)" (S470). Then, "00H" is set in order to clear the content of the winning / decision flag of the special symbol (S471).

  On the other hand, if the small symbol data "33H" is not stored in the special symbol determination flag (S466: NO), that is, if the deviation data "00H" is stored in the special symbol determination flag, S467 to S471 are performed. skip. In addition, when the special symbol determination flag is the outlier data, the process of clearing the content of the flag is not performed because "00H" is originally stored as the outlier data.

(Special electric accessory control processing)
Next, the special electric auditors product control process (S66) will be described. 35 to 37 are flowcharts showing the details of the electric accessory control process (S66).

  First, it is determined whether or not the special electric auditors game game status is "01H (special game)" (S501). When the special electric auditors product game status is "01H" (S501: YES), it is determined whether or not the winning combination operation gate passage flag is on (S502). When the combination operation gate passage flag is ON (S502: YES), the special game process is executed in the subsequent process. In this special game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric accessory 542 is operating (S503). When the special electric accessory 542 is not operating (S503: NO), it is determined whether or not it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S504). The operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 is the timing of starting the operation of the special electric accessory 542 in each round game.

  If it is the operation start time of the special electric accessory 542 (S504: YES), an effect control command (round effect designation command) is generated to start the round effect, and this is stored in the command of the main information storage unit 180. The data is stored in the area (S505). On the side of the effect control board 200, a round effect corresponding to each round game during the special game is executed based on the information (information such as the current number of rounds) of this round effect designation command. Then, the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started (S506), and the processing of S507 to S511 is executed as the processing during the operation of the special electric accessory 542.

  As a process during the operation of the special electric auditors product 542, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the specified winning number (maximum winning number) in the special winning opening 54 (S507), and the operation time of the special electric auditors product 542. It is determined whether (open time) has elapsed (S508). At this time, when the game ball has won the specified winning number (maximum winning number) in the special winning opening 54 (S507: YES) or when the operation time of the special electric auditors product 542 has elapsed (S508: YES), The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S509). Then, it is determined whether or not the number of continuous operations of the special electric auditors product 542 has reached a predetermined specified number of rounds (S510). When the number of continuous operations does not reach the specified number of rounds (S510: NO), the number of continuous operations of the special electric auditors product 542 is incremented by 1 (S511).

  On the other hand, if the number of continuous operations of the special electric accessory 542 has reached the specified number of rounds (S510: YES), the process proceeds to S512, and the end demo display time is set as the special game hit end demo setting process. At the same time, an effect control command (big hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (S512).

  Next, the probability variation number information determined in S345 is stored in the probability variation number counter (S513). Further, the fluctuation time reduction number information stored in the fluctuation time reduction number counter is stored (S514). In addition, the information on the number of easy-to-enter states determined in S347 is stored in the easy-to-enter state counter (S515).

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the operation of the condition device is an operation by a specific symbol (so-called probability variation symbol) with reference to the type of symbol group (big hit type) determined in S340 (S516). If it is the operation of the condition device according to the specific symbol (S516: YES), the operation time data "64H" is stored in the probability fluctuation number counter of the main information storage unit 180, and the operation of the probability fluctuation function of the special symbol is started. Yes (S517). On the other hand, if the condition device is not operating according to the specific symbol (S516: NO), the non-operation data "00H" is stored in the probability variation counter, and S517 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the variation time reduction number information set in S514 is variation time reduction function operation data (data other than "00H") (S518). If it is the variable time reduction function operation data (S518: YES), the operation of the variable time reduction function of the special symbol is started (S519). On the other hand, if it is not the variation time reduction function operation data (S518: NO), S519 is skipped.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the information on the number of times of easy entry of the ball set in S515 is the electric power support function operation data (data other than "00H") (S520). If the data is the electric power support function operation data (S520: YES), the operation of the electric power support function is started (S521 to S523). That is, the operation start of the probability fluctuation function of the normal symbol (S521), the operation start of the variable time shortening function of the normal symbol (S522), the operation start of the opening extension function of the ordinary electric accessory 522 (S523) are sequentially executed. On the other hand, if the data is not the electric power support function operation data, S521 to S523 are skipped.

  Next, the state is switched to the variation pattern selection state determined in S349 (S524). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the game state information after the special game and the variation pattern selection state information set in S513 to S524 described above is generated, and this is stored in the main information storage unit 180. It is stored in the command storage area (S525). On the side of the effect control board 200, the effect mode after the special game is set based on the information of the game state designation command. Then, the special electric accessory game game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (hit waiting state)" (S526).

  On the other hand, if the special electric auditors product game status is not "01H (special game)" (S501: NO), the process proceeds to S530 and whether the special electric auditors product game status is "02H (small hit game)". It is determined whether or not (S530). When the special electric auditors game game status is "02H" (S530: YES), the small hit game process is executed in the subsequent process.

  In the small hit game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special electric auditors product 542 is operating (S531). If the special electric accessory 542 is not operating (S531: NO), the operation of the special electric accessory 542 is started (S532). On the other hand, if the special electric accessory 542 is operating (S531: YES), S532 is skipped.

  Subsequently, as a process during operation of the special electric auditors product 542, it is determined whether or not the game balls have won the maximum winning number in the special winning opening 54 (S533), and the operation time of the special electric auditors product 542 (opening). It is determined whether or not (time) has elapsed (S534). At this time, if the game ball has won the specified winning number (maximum winning number) in the special winning opening 54 (S533: YES) or if the operation time of the special electric auditors product 542 has elapsed (S534: YES), The operation of the electric accessory 542 is stopped (S535).

  Next, with the end of the small hit game, the variation interruption flag is turned off (S536). In addition, triggered by the fact that this variation interruption flag is turned off, the interruption state is released for the variation display of the other special symbol, and the variation display will be restarted (related to the variation display by the special symbol game timer). Measurement of variable time is restarted).

  Subsequently, as a small hit game end demo setting process, an end demo display time is set and an effect control command (small hit end demo command) for instructing the start of the end demo effect is generated (S537). Then, the state is switched to the variation pattern selection state determined in S347 (S538). Subsequently, an effect control command (game state designation command) including the variation pattern selection state information after the special game set in S537 is generated and stored in the command storage area of the main information storage unit 180 ( S539). This game state designating command is used on the side of the effect control board 200 to determine the timing of transition of the effect mode, specify the effect mode of the transfer destination, and the like. Then, the special electric accessory game game status is changed from "01H (special game)" to "00H (hit waiting state)" (S540).

<Processing on the production control board side>
Next, the procedure of the operation process in the effect control board 200 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 38 to 43. The process on the effect control board 200 side includes a reset start process (including the effect control side main process) that is executed when the sub-main CPU 201 is reset such as after the power is turned on, and an effect control side timer interrupt activated at regular intervals. The process, the reception interrupt process of the reception control command activated due to the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and the lamp activated upon the arrival of the predetermined generation time defined in the time schedule of the variable production pattern. It is configured to include effect interrupt processing and image control command transmission interrupt processing that is activated at regular intervals.

  Each interrupt process (exception process) is set with a priority level indicating the priority when a plurality of interrupt processes occur. In this example, "reset start processing by power supply reset: highest priority", "reset start processing by various abnormalities: highest priority" → "reception interrupt processing of production control command: level 7" → "WDT (when runaway is detected) The priority levels are prioritized in the order of reset start processing: level 3> image control command transmission interrupt processing: level 2> performance control timer interrupt processing: level 1. It should be noted that the “reset start processing upon various abnormalities” is performed by, for example, DMA (Direct Memory) when the sub-main CPU 201 executes an illegal instruction, when the sub-main CPU 201 tries to access in an illegal area or an illegal method. Access) Activated when an error occurs during transfer. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of interrupt processing described above are illustrated, but in reality, other interrupt processing also exists.

  In the main control of the effect control side, basically, the process is performed after setting all the interrupts disabled or interrupts other than the effect control command reception interrupt. Then, when the effect control side main process is in the interrupt enabled state, each interrupt process is activated by interrupting the main process. In each interrupt process, if there is a request for another interrupt process (multiple interrupts occur) during execution of the interrupt process, as long as it is an interrupt process with a higher priority level than the interrupt process being executed, in principle While the interrupt request is permitted, the interrupt request is prohibited when the interrupt processing has a lower priority level or the same priority level as the interrupt processing being executed. That is, each interrupt process proceeds in a state where other interrupts having the same priority level or low priority levels are prohibited. Then, each interrupt process returns to the main process on the effect control side in a state where all interrupts are permitted. Note that the priority order (priority level) of such interrupt factors is defined by register settings of the effect control microcomputer 210 (interrupt controller).

<< Reset start processing >>
First, the reset start process of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the reset start process of the effect control board 200. In this reset start process, the power is turned on, a reset caused by various abnormalities, or a reset caused by WDT (when a runaway is detected) is started, and a security check is performed on the sub-main CPU 201. , The program starts, and the processing after S601 is started.

  First, as an initial setting required when the power is turned on, a leading address is set in the stack pointer as an initial value of the stack area (S601). Then, all interrupt processing is prohibited until various initial settings are completed (S602).

  Subsequently, as a basic setting regarding hardware, an initial value is set in a built-in register provided in the sub-main CPU 201 and the I / O port circuit 204 is initialized (S603). Further, the memory area in the RAM 203 of the effect control microcomputer 210 is initialized (S604). Here, an initial value is set for a variable with an initial value, and initialization by clearing 0 is performed for a variable without an initial value. Further, the sub-main CPU 201 appropriately expands the control program stored in the ROM 202 in the RAM 203.

  Then, interrupts other than the reception interrupt process of the effect control command are prohibited (S605). Next, of the various types of errors set in advance for each model, the type of error that should be valid for the model is set (S606). Further, a turn-off request is made in order to turn off all the effect lamps LP (frame lamp 10, board lamp 80) (S607). Then, the watchdog timer is activated to monitor the runaway of the sub-main CPU 201 (S608).

  Then, the production control side main processing is executed as the main processing of the game production (S609). Details of this effect control side main processing (S609) will be described later with reference to FIG. It should be noted that, when the process shifts to the main process on the production control side in S609, there is normally no possibility of returning from the main process to the reset start process, but in the unlikely event of a return to this process due to a bug in the program or the like. First, the power consumption is changed to the low power consumption mode (sleep mode) in which the power consumption is reduced compared to the normal operation.

<Main processing on the production control side>
Next, the main process (S609) on the effect control side of the effect control board 200 will be described. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the effect control side main processing (S609).

  First, an address (start address where the program is expanded) for starting checking whether or not the control program is correctly expanded in the RAM 203 in the main process on the effect control side is acquired (S611). Then, all the interrupts are permitted (the activation of various interrupt processes is permitted) (S612).

  Next, the device initialization operation is executed (S613). This initialization operation is an operation mode that is executed only once when the power of the pachinko game machine PM is turned on (when reset is started), and in order to control the operation of the movable accessory 24 by a device such as a motor or a solenoid. It is executed for the purpose of confirming the positional information required for. At the end of the initialization operation, the movable accessory 24 returns to the preset initial position (reference position).

  Then, in order to restart the watchdog timer, the watchdog timer is cleared (S614). At this time, when the sub-main CPU 201 is executing the program normally, a predetermined clear word is written in the WDT clear register of the sub-main CPU 201 within a preset time-out time, so that the watchdog timer It is cleared and restarted. On the other hand, when the watchdog timer times out, a user reset occurs.

  Then, the input port check process is executed (S615). In this input port check processing, the reading of the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) in the port input / output processing S912 in the timer interrupt processing described later is monitored every time an interrupt occurs, and monitoring is performed a plurality of times (for example, four times). If the input port states are all "1", the signal level is "1 (H level)", if all "0", the signal level is "0 (L level)", otherwise the signal level is Do not change (this determines the input signal).

  Then, an error effect management process is executed (S616). In this error effect management process, error effects by various devices are started based on the error effect pattern set in the subsequent command analysis process (S622). Further, in the error effect management process, an error management timer is set to an initial value (error effect time) to manage the progress of the error effect. This error management timer is subtracted and updated at a cycle of 16 ms in the error management timer updating process (S920) of the effect control side timer interrupt process. When the error management timer times out, the error effect is ended.

  Then, the effect button monitoring control process is executed (S617). In this effect button monitoring control process, when the button notice effect is incorporated during the fluctuation of the symbol, the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored within a predetermined operation effective time, and the information regarding the input state of the effect button 15 is monitored. Hold.

  Subsequently, the notice lottery management process is executed (S618). In this notice lottery management process, a notice effect pattern that defines the contents of the notice effect that occurs at each stage of the decorative pattern changing process is created in accordance with the variation effect pattern scenario selected in the subsequent command analysis process (S620). Determined by lottery. The notice effect pattern number determined here is temporarily stored in the notice effect pattern storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260. Further, an image control command for designating this notice effect pattern number to the image control board 300 side is generated and set in the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage means 260. At this time, when the accessory preview effect pattern is selected as the announcement effect pattern, an accessory request is generated, and the drive pattern of the movable accessory 24 is specified in the subsequent device management process (S619). . In this example, the main loop processing efficiency is improved rather than the lottery of all of the plurality of types of notice effects (notice effect patterns) that occur within one variation of the decorative design, within one main loop process. For this reason, the lottery is configured to be divided for each generation time of the notice effect (for example, the variation start stage, the reach generation stage, the variation stop stage) over a plurality of main loop processes. At that time, for the notice effect that occurs at the variation start stage of the decorative design, it is necessary to synchronize with the variation start of the decorative design (send the image control command as soon as possible), so the lottery is performed within the starting main loop process. I am supposed to do it.

  Next, a device management process is executed (S619). In this device management process, when there is an operation request (lamp request, accessory request) of various devices in the command analysis process (S620) described later, a plurality of types of pattern data (lamp pattern, drive pattern) stored in the ROM 203 is stored. ), The pattern data corresponding to the effect number (lamp effect number, accessory notice effect number) is specified, and control of the target device is started. In the lamp pattern data of the effect lamp LP, lamp data associated with each one frame time (time required to update the image frame once: 16 ms) is stored as schedule data. In the present example, one frame time corresponds to the time required for one frame drawing processing when the effect display device 70 draws at about 60 frames per second (= about 60 fps). Similarly, in the drive pattern data of the movable accessory 24, drive data associated with each interrupt cycle (1 ms) is stored as schedule data. As a result, each control data (lamp data, drive data, etc.) is output to the target device at regular intervals in the effect control timer interrupt processing described later, and the operation of the target device is started. On the other hand, in the production control timer interrupt process described later, when the output of the series of control data (lamp data, drive data) is all completed, the production lamp LP is turned off or the operation of the movable accessory 24 is stopped. , Control of the target device ends.

  Then, a command analysis process (S620) is executed. In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the read effect control command is read. Perform effect control processing corresponding to the type. Details of this command analysis processing (S620) will be described later using FIG.

  Then, during the current loop processing, it is determined whether command analysis (analysis of effect control command) has been executed (S621). In the case immediately after the command analysis (S621: YES), the process returns to S614 and shifts to the next loop processing. On the other hand, when the command analysis is not executed (S621: NO), that is, when the command buffer is empty, the effect lottery random number updating process is executed until a predetermined time has elapsed (S622). In the present embodiment, “16 ms”, which is half the minimum unit (32 ms) of the switching control of the lamp LP, is set as the predetermined time. In this effect lottery random number update processing, various effect lottery random numbers such as a look-ahead notice lottery random number, a decorative pattern random number, a variation effect pattern random number, and a notice effect pattern random number are updated. Specifically, the numerical value of each random number counter is incremented by 1, and when the numerical value exceeds the maximum value, it is returned to the minimum value.

(Command analysis process)
Next, the command analysis process (S622) will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing details of the command analysis process (S622). In this command analysis processing, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command from the main control board 100 is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260, and the effect corresponding to the type of the stored effect control command is monitored. Perform control processing.

  First, it is determined whether a game state designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S631). When the game state designation command is stored (step S631: YES), the process proceeds to the effect state transition process (S632). In the effect state transition process (S632), a process of changing the effect mode is executed based on the game state information and the variation pattern selection state information included in the game state designation command.

  Then, it is determined whether or not the hold-related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S633). Here, the hold-related commands include a symbol storage number command and a preliminary determination command. If this hold-related command is stored (S633: YES), the process moves to the hold information management process (S634). In this hold information management processing (S634), the symbol storage number command or the pre-determination command is read from the sub-main information storage means 260, pre-reading determination is executed based on the information of the pre-determination result, and the reserved image on the effect display device 70 is also executed. A process for updating the number of held images and the display mode (display color etc.) displayed on the display unit 710 is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether or not a symbol variation related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S635). Here, the symbol variation related command includes a variation start command and a variation stop command. When the symbol variation related command is stored (step S635: YES), the process proceeds to the variation effect content determination process (S636). In this variation effect content determination processing (S636), if the received symbol variation related command is a variation start command, a process for starting variation effect of the decorative symbol is executed, and the received symbol variation related command stops changing. If it is a command, a process for ending the variation effect of the decorative pattern is executed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not a big hit performance related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S637). Here, the big hit production related commands include a big hit start demonstration effect command, a round effect designation command, and a big hit end demonstration effect command. When the big hit production related command is stored (step S637: YES), the process shifts to the big hit production content determination processing (S638). In this jackpot effect content determination processing (S638), processing for executing a start demonstration effect, a round effect, and an end demonstration effect is performed.

  Then, it is determined whether or not a small hit production related command is stored in the command storage area of the sub-main information storage unit 260 (S639). Here, the small hit production related commands include a small hit start demonstration effect command and a small hit end demonstration effect command. When the small hit production related command is stored (step S639: YES), the processing shifts to the small hit production content determination processing (S640). In this small hit production content determination processing (S640), processing for executing a small hit start demonstration effect and a small hit end demonstration effect is performed.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the error effect designation command is stored in the command storage area of the sub information storage unit 280 (S641). When this error effect designation command is stored (S641: YES), the process proceeds to the error effect content determination process (S642). In this error effect content determination processing (S642), an error effect specification command is read from the sub-information storage unit 280, and an error effect pattern for notifying an error state by turning on the effect lamp LP or the sound of the speaker 11 is determined. ..

  When the effect control command is not stored in the command storage area of the sub information storage unit 280 (S631: NO, S633: NO, S635: NO, S637: NO, S639: NO, S641: NO), do nothing. The command analysis process ends.

<Reception control command reception interrupt processing>
Next, the reception interrupt processing of the production control command will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing reception interrupt processing of a production control command. In this effect control command reception interrupt process, as described above, an interrupt is generated based on the input of the strobe signal from the main control board 100, and various effect control commands are acquired in this interrupt process. It is like this. The effect control command is configured to include 1-byte MODE data and 1-byte EVENT data, and the MODE data and the EVENT data are transmitted from the main control board 100 to the effect control board 200 in this order. Hereinafter, for convenience of explanation, MODE data is also referred to as “first command”, and EVENT data is also referred to as “second command”.

  First, when an interrupt based on a strobe signal from the main control board 100 occurs, it is determined whether the input value of the effect control command has been decided (S901). Specifically, the input value becomes final when the command data is read up to 5 times and the same value is read twice consecutively. This is because reading of the effect control command may fail due to noise or the like, and the input value is not determined until the same value is read twice consecutively.

  Subsequently, it is determined whether the command received this time is the first command (MODE), in other words, whether the command is the first command (MODE) or the second command (EVENT) (S902). When the command received this time is the first command (S902: YES), the first command is temporarily stored in the temporary area (S903). Then, the effect lottery random number is obtained from the effect lottery random number generation means 210, and this random number information is temporarily stored in the effect lottery random number storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260 (S904). The acquisition time of the effect lottery random number is set at the time of receiving the effect control command. The effect control command is transmitted at a physically irregular timing such as when the game ball starts winning or when the special symbol starts changing. Therefore, this is an opportunity to prevent the occurrence of periodicity at the time of acquisition. In this way, by making the acquisition time of the effect lottery random number irregular, it is less likely that the same effect is unnaturally and repeatedly selected in various effect lottery.

  On the other hand, when the command received this time is the second command (S902: NO), it is determined whether the first command has already been received (S905). That is, it is determined whether or not the production control commands are received in the order of the first command (MODE) and the second command (EVENT), and it is confirmed whether or not there is a contradiction in the combination of the production control commands. If there is no contradiction in the combination of effect control commands (S905: YES), the address indicated by the write pointer (pointer for writing) is acquired (S906). Then, the first command and the second command are stored in the effect control command buffer (ring buffer) of the sub-main information storage unit 260 according to the address designated by the write pointer (S907). The stored command data is read in the command analysis process (S620) in the main process, and the effect control process corresponding to the type of effect control command is executed. Next, the address indicated by the write pointer is updated (S908). Further, the command data (first command) temporarily stored in S903 is cleared (S909). Then, the effect control command reception interrupt process is ended, and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt.

<Performance control timer interrupt processing>
Next, the production control timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the effect control timer interrupt processing. This timer interrupt process is activated by a clock pulse at regular intervals, and is executed by interrupting the above-mentioned effect control side main process.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the contents of the registers in the sub-main CPU 201 are saved in the stack area of the RAM 203, and then the processing from S911 onward is sequentially executed. In this timer interrupt process, interrupts of priority level 2 or higher such as effect control command reception interrupts from the main control board 100 and watchdog timer interrupts are permitted (S911).

  Then, a port input / output process is executed (S912). In this port input / output processing, input / output processing of port data in the I / O port circuit 204 is performed. In the input process, various signals input to the I / O port circuit 204 (input port) are read and stored as input information. In the output process, various control signals (motor control signals) temporarily stored in the sub-main information storage unit 260 are read out and output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port).

  Subsequently, a device control data output process is executed (S913). In this device control data output process, drive data for a predetermined time is read from the drive pattern data specified in the device management process (S619) and set in the drive data storage area of the sub-main information storage means 260. The drive data set in this process is data indicating control for 1 ms corresponding to the interrupt cycle. When the drive data is set in this process, the drive data is output from the I / O port circuit 204 (output port) to the motor driver 92 in the next timer interrupt process. Therefore, in this device control data output processing, the drive data is switched every interrupt cycle (1 ms) according to the drive pattern data.

  Next, performance timer update processing is executed (S914). In this effect timer update processing, the values of various effect timers used for effect operation control are subtracted and updated for each interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The effect timer includes a timer for managing the variation time of the decorative design, a timer for managing the occurrence timing of the notice effect, and the like. This production timer manages the time schedule in the fluctuating production pattern, and time management of the driving timing of the movable accessory 24, the lighting timing of the production lamp LP, etc. is performed on the time axis. The effect timer is also used in the device control data output process (S913) and the lamp data update process (S917) in the effect control timer interrupt process.

  Then, the button control timer updating process is executed (S915). The value of the effective time management timer for managing the effective operation time of the effect button 15 is subtracted and updated for each interrupt cycle (1 ms in this embodiment). The operation valid time is the time during which the operation input of the effect button 15 is valid.

  Subsequently, the task control counter updating process is executed (S916). In this task control counter updating process, the value (“0” to “15”) of the task counter is updated for each timer interrupt. Specifically, if the value of the task counter is "0" to "14", it is incremented by 1, and if the value of the task counter is "15", it is returned to "0". That is, this task counter can take a circulation cycle of 16 ms. Then, various tasks (task processing) are assigned corresponding to the value of the task counter updated this time, and the ramp control task (lamp data update processing of S917) and runaway monitoring are assigned according to the value of the task counter. Each processing such as a task (image CPU runaway monitoring processing of S9189) and an error management task (error management timer updating processing of S919) is executed. In this example, one of the values (“0” to “15”) of the task counter is assigned to the lamp control task, and the other two values (values at intervals of 8 ms) are used for runaway monitoring. It is assigned to a task and another one value is assigned to the error management task (the description of the other tasks is omitted). In addition, as described above, the circulation cycle of the task counter is set to 16 ms in order to match it with the minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP. The minimum unit (16 ms) of the switching control of the effect lamp LP corresponds to one frame time of the image frame, and the image effect and the lamp effect are synchronized.

  Then, the lamp data update process is executed (S917). In the lamp data updating process, the lamp data for a predetermined time is read and set from the lamp pattern data specified in the device management process (S621). The lamp data set in this process is data indicating the lighting control for 16 ms which is the minimum unit of the switching control of the effect lamp LP. When the lamp data is set, the lamp data is automatically output from the output port (serial port) to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer. The ramp data output process is configured as a serial communication interrupt process, and is realized by sequentially writing the ramp data in the transmission buffer of the serial communication circuit. The serial communication circuit serially converts the lamp data in the transmission buffer in 1-byte units, and outputs it to the lamp connection board 91 bit by bit in synchronization with the serial clock. This process is repeated until the transmission buffer becomes empty, whereby all the ramp data (all bytes) stored in the transmission buffer are output. Therefore, in the lamp data updating process, the lamp data is switched every frame time (16 ms) according to the lamp pattern, and the lamp data is output to the lamp connection board 91 by serial transfer.

  Subsequently, the image CPU runaway monitoring process is executed (S918). In the image CPU runaway monitoring process, the toggle signal input from the image control board 300 is monitored, and when the toggle signal does not continuously change for 1600 ms (about 50 to 100 frames), the image control board 300 is monitored. It is determined that the sub-sub CPU 301 is running out of control, and the effect control board 200 transmits a reset signal to the image control board 300. As a result, the image control board 300 side executes a predetermined reset process when the reset state of the sub-sub CPU 301 occurs. Note that the toggle signal is a signal having a waveform in which H level / L level is alternately repeated every frame time.

  Next, an error management timer process is executed (S919). In this error management timer process, the value of the error effect timer for managing the error effect time set in the error effect management process (S616) is subtracted and updated. Then, after all interrupts are enabled and the saved contents of the register are restored, the effect control timer interrupt process is terminated and the process returns to the original process before the interrupt occurred.

<< Image control command transmission interrupt processing >>
Next, the transmission interrupt process of the image control command will be described. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing the transmission interrupt processing of the image control command. This image control command transmission interrupt process occurs at preset constant intervals (500 μs).

  In this image control command transmission interrupt process, first, the image control command buffer of the sub-main information storage unit 260 is checked (S931). Then, the read pointer is acquired in the image control command buffer (S932). Next, it is determined whether the image control command is stored in the image control command buffer (S933). Whether or not the image control command is stored can be confirmed by, for example, the read pointer and the write pointer. If the read pointer and the write pointer match, it means that the image control command is not stored. If the image control command is stored (S933: YES), the image control command is read from the area pointed to by the read pointer (S934). The read image control command is set in the output buffer of the serial communication circuit designated as the output destination (S935). As a result, the image control command is serially transmitted from the serial port to the image control board 300. Then, the command data (the command data transmitted in S935) is cleared (S936). Then, the read pointer is incremented by 1 and updated (S937). Then, the transmission interrupt process of the image control command is ended, and the original process before the interrupt is restored.

  The main effects achieved in this embodiment are summarized below.

  According to this embodiment, the variation pattern selection state is set to the limited frequency selection state within the limited period (within four rotations) immediately after the transition from the advantageous game state to the normal game state, and the variation pattern selection state is normally selected. Compared with the case of the state, by relatively increasing the variation efficiency of the second special symbol, even if the operation holding ball of the second special symbol that occurred during the advantageous game state is digested during the normal game state , The variation display of the second special symbol will not be peculiar (variation display for an extremely long time, etc.), so that the player feels uncomfortable or uncomfortable with the gaming situation immediately after the transition to the normal gaming state. It is possible to make it difficult to hold, and as a result, it becomes possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the rush probability (transition probability) to the latent probability variation game state is the same regardless of the game state at the time of big hit winning. On the other hand, when the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, the rush probability (transition probability) to the latent probability variation game state can be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the big hit. With the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game, the transition condition to the latent certainty variation game state (small hit RUSH mode) as the most advantageous game state is made different, and until this most advantageous game state is reached. Since it is possible to have variations in the way of transition of the game state, it is possible to create a game property that is complicated and diversified, which has never been achieved, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the external information signal from the external information terminal board 600 is triggered not by the condition device being actuated but by the accessory continuous operation device being actuated. By outputting (big hit signal, signal during the condominium) to an external device, even when an irregular event such as a big hit (so-called accident) of the second special symbol occurs in this normal game state, In the waiting state of the big hit game until the game ball passes to the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92 after the condition device is activated, the occurrence of this big hit is caused only by a specific player according to the display result of the external device (data display device). Since it is possible to avoid the situation of being exposed to the game, it is possible to ensure fairness of the game, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

  According to the present embodiment, in the gaming state in which the variable display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, and the symbol determination signal is not output, Further, in the gaming state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is the main subject of the game, by being configured so as not to output the symbol determination signal when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first Of the variable display of the special symbol and the second special symbol, the number of variable display based on the starting winning that has been accidentally (irregularly) occurred in the game state of the current stay is eliminated, and in the game state of the current stay. Since it is possible to extract only the originally intended number of effective variable displays, the operating status of the gaming machine can be properly managed by the hall computer, and the true operating status of the gaming machine can be displayed. Can be used as reference information for decisions and game of the gaming machine to select and informed to the player by the indicator, as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, during the execution of the small hit RUSH mode, the variable display of the big hit of the first special symbol is executed based on that the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is the big hit (so-called accident hit). If it is done, until the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is forcibly ended (that is, by switching to the variable effect indicating that the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, the game Until the person recognizes the end of the small hit RUSH mode), since only the small hit RUSH mode (probability of latent change game state) can be suggested or notified, notification indicating the continuation or end of the small hit RUSH mode It is possible to prevent a notification effect that betrays the expectations of the player, such as a discrepancy between the content and the actual game result, and as a result, it is possible to improve the fun of the game. That.

<Modification 1 of the first embodiment>
FIG. 44 is a transition diagram of the game state and the effect mode in the modified example of the first embodiment. In the above embodiment, in the limited period immediately after the transition from the advantageous game state (time saving game state, latent probability variation game state, probability variation game state) to the normal game state, the operation of the second special symbol generated during the advantage game state Although a special mode for setting up the hold ball at high speed is set, in this modification, the probability of executing a specific production with high rarity within a predetermined period immediately after the transition from the advantageous game state to the normal game state is possible. The special mode set relatively higher than the other effect modes (normal modes) is set. In the predetermined period in this modified example, "20 times" is set as the variable display number of special symbols.

  In the present modification, the specific effect is a rare premium effect in which the appearance rate is relatively low and the jackpot expectation is set relatively high. The premiere effect is an effect in which a big hit is guaranteed in the variable display (a rare effect in which the big hit expectation is set to 100%). In this modification, a specific premiere effect (referred to as a "specific premier effect") is targeted among the plurality of types of premier effects as the above-mentioned special effect. The specific premiere effect is, for example, a premier lamp effect in which the frame lamp 10 provided on the glass frame 5 lights up in a rainbow color to notify a big hit, or a premier image (for example, a premier image on the screen of the effect display device 70). Appearance of a character) corresponds to a premiere notice production in which a big hit is notified. In addition, the specific premiere effect in the present modification is configured as a big hit confirmation effect in which the jackpot expectation degree is set to 100%, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot expectation degree is set to less than 100%. It may be configured as a high-expectation effect (heat effect effect).

  When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the specific premiere effect can be executed even when the player is staying in an effect mode (normal mode) other than the special mode. However, the execution probability of the specific premiere effect is set to be higher in the case of staying in the special mode than in the case of staying in the normal mode. That is, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the execution probability of the particular premiere effect is set to be different depending on the effect mode during the stay. The reason for setting such a special mode is, for example, when the advantageous game state with a high advantage for the player such as the latent probability change game state ends and the player falls to the normal game state with a low advantage for the player. Also, by moving to a special mode in which the execution probability of highly rare premiere production has been improved, during the period of staying in this special mode, the production of premiere production that can only be seen rarely occurs. This is because benefits can be provided, the monotony of the game effect can be eliminated, and the sustainability of the game can be improved. In this modified example, a predetermined prefetching effect is provided as the prefetching effect set to be executable while staying in the special mode. Predetermined look-ahead effect, the possibility of jackpot winning or high-expectation effect occurs over one or more times the symbol variation display before the operation hold ball (trigger hold) that was the target of the look-ahead lottery is exhausted. It is an effect that suggests or informs in advance. As the predetermined look-ahead effect, for example, a hold change look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the hold image to suggest the jackpot expectation level is applicable. In this modified example, as the types of the pending change prefetching effect, the pending change prefetching effect A and the pending change prefetching effect B are provided. It should be noted that, in principle, the jackpot expectation degree of the pending change prefetching effect is set to be different depending on the final display mode of the pending image as the mode of effect. In this modified example, as the display mode of the reserved image, for example, six types of “white”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, “gold”, and “rainbow” are set. The display mode of the held image is related to the reliability (big hit expectation) at which the result of the hit determination is a big hit, and “white” <“blue” <“green” <“red” <“gold” <“ It is set so that the jackpot expectation is increased by one step in the order of "rainbow". In addition, "rainbow color" is a display mode in which it is assured that the big hit is won in the variable display performed when the trigger hold which is the target of the prefetch lottery is exhausted. Here, the pending change prefetching effect A is a prefetching effect in which the pending change can be executed according to the pending change pattern A having a relatively high jackpot expectation. This hold change pattern A is an effect pattern in which the final display mode of the trigger hold (hold image) that is the target of the prefetch lottery changes to a display mode (for example, red) with a relatively high jackpot expectation. On the other hand, the pending change prefetching effect B is a prefetching effect in which the pending change can be executed according to the pending change pattern B having a relatively low jackpot expectation. This hold change pattern B is an effect pattern in which the final display mode of the trigger hold (hold image) that is the target of the prefetch lottery changes to a display mode (for example, blue) with a relatively low jackpot expectation. In the present modification, the pending change prefetching effect A is more specified than the case where the pending change prefetching effect B is executed, in the variable display in which the trigger hold targeted for the prefetch lottery is exhausted. It is configured to increase the possibility that a premiere production will appear. At this time, the specific effect may be executed in the variable display (referred to as “trigger fluctuation display”) performed by the trigger hold being exhausted, but before the variable display performed by the trigger hold being exhausted. The specific effect is not executed in the variable display that is performed (referred to as “pre-trigger variable display”). Regarding the pending change lookahead effect B, the background effect corresponding to the special mode is easier to execute (execute the pending change lookahead effect B than the background effect corresponding to the normal mode set after the end of the special mode. Frequency is relatively high). In addition, as for the button effect (a button image that prompts the player to operate the effect button 15 is displayed, and when the player actually operates the effect button 15, the button image is switched to another notice effect) The trigger variation display is easier to execute than the previous variation display (the execution frequency is relatively high). For example, this button effect has a button effect A in which a blue button image is displayed and a button effect B in which a red button image is displayed, and the button effect B is larger than the button effect A in expectation of a big hit. Is relatively high (when the effect button 15 is operated when the button effect B appears, the jackpot expectation is higher than when the effect button 15 is operated when the button effect A appears. Notice production is likely to occur). At this time, at a predetermined timing during execution of the trigger variation display (for example, in the trigger variation display that is a variation display of 60 seconds, a timing 50 seconds after the variation starts (timing during SP reach)), the button effect It is preferable that either one of A and button effect B can appear. As a modification thereof, both the button effect A and the button effect B may appear while the trigger variation display is being executed (for example, in the trigger variation display that is the variation display of 60 seconds, the variation start is started. The button effect A is executed 20 seconds later (timing before SP reach), and the button effect B is executed 50 seconds after the start of variation (timing during SP reach). On the other hand, when the button effect appears during execution of the pre-trigger variable display, the button effect A is more likely to appear than the button effect B. Further, when the specific effect (premier effect) appears during execution of the trigger variation display, the button effect B is more likely to appear than when the specific effect (premier effect) does not occur during execution of the trigger variation display.

  FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram showing an effect mode table in the present modification. In this effect mode table, the upper limit number of times in the effect mode, the target for counting the remaining number of times (type of special symbol), and the timing for displaying the remaining number of times are defined in correspondence with each effect mode.

  In this modified example, an effect mode counter is provided for counting the number of times the special symbols are changed and displayed during each stay in each effect mode. That is, the number of executions of the effect mode (the remaining number of times until the effect mode ends) is controlled based on the count value counted by the effect mode counter. In this effect mode counter, a value (referred to as "upper limit number") corresponding to the variable display number of special symbols is set as an initial value as a period during which the player can stay in the destination effect mode, and variable display of special symbols is set. It is updated (subtracted) each time it is executed. That is, when the effect mode shifts to the predetermined effect mode, the effect mode counter is set to the upper limit number of times, which is the period during which the effect mode can stay in the predetermined effect mode, and the variable display of the special symbol is executed once. Every time (variable display of special symbols is started), the count value is decremented by 1. Then, when the count value of the effect mode counter reaches “0”, it becomes an opportunity to end the predetermined effect mode (the other effect mode is started from the next variable display). In this modified example, the upper limit number assigned to the special mode is “20 times”, the upper limit number assigned to the time saving mode is “70 times”, the upper limit number assigned to the latent probability mode is “100 times”, and the probability variation mode. The upper limit number of times allocated to is 100 times. In addition, in the normal mode, there is no upper limit to the number of times of change display of special symbols.

  In the present modification, the effect mode counter, when the effect mode currently staying is the special mode, as the variable display number of the special symbol executed during the stay in the effect mode, only the variable display number of the first special symbol is displayed. Be counted. That is, when the effect mode is the special mode, the count value of the effect mode counter is only the variable display count of the first special symbol which is the main subject of the game in the special effect mode (normal game state), and the second special value. The variable display number of symbols is not included. Therefore, the upper limit number “20 times” assigned to the special mode means that the variable display number of the first special symbol reaches 20 times. Therefore, since the variable display number of the second special symbol is not counted, the remaining number of special modes is not updated (subtracted) no matter how many times the variable display of the second special symbol is performed. Therefore, in this special mode, there may be a case of staying for a period exceeding 20 times (the maximum number of times) as the sum of the variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this way, the actual number of stays in the special mode is a variable period that varies according to the number of times the second special symbol fluctuates and is displayed. It is permissible based on When the effect mode is the normal mode, the next big hit does not occur, and the number of times the variable display of the first special symbol reaches 20 times (when the count value of the effect mode counter reaches the upper limit number of times). ), The normal mode will be entered.

  On the other hand, in the production mode counter, when the production mode in which the user is currently staying is the latent probability mode, the probability variation mode, or the time saving mode, as the number of times that the special symbol is changed and displayed during the stay in the production mode, the first special symbol is displayed. The variable display number and the variable display number of the second special symbol are targeted for counting (the total number of variable display numbers of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is targeted for counting). That is, when the production mode in which the user is currently staying is a latent probability mode or the like (latent probability mode, probability variation mode, time saving mode), the count value of the production mode count is the second special value which is the main body of the game in this latent probability mode or the like. Not only the variable display number of symbols, but the variable display number of the first special symbol is also targeted. That is, the number of stays such as the latent probability mode is the number of times the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated (specified ST number = 100 times) or the number of times the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is activated (specific number = 70 times), The sum of the variable display count of the first special symbol and the variable display count of the second special symbol corresponds to the target.

  In the present modification, even if any of the effect modes (excluding the normal mode) is staying, the change of the special symbol on the screen of the effect display device 70 until the effect mode of the present stay is ended. The remaining number of times of display (the count value of the above-mentioned effect mode counter) can be displayed. The remaining number display of the effect mode is decremented by "1" each time the variable display of the special symbol (variable display of the decorative symbol) is performed once based on the count value of the effect mode counter.

  The display of the remaining number of effect modes is executed at different timings according to the type of effect mode in which the user is currently staying. Specifically, when the effect mode is the special mode, the remaining number of times is displayed from the variable display of the first rotation immediately after the transition to the effect mode. On the other hand, when the effect mode is the latent probability mode, the probability variation mode, or the time saving mode, the variation display (21st rotation) after the variation display for the predetermined number of times (20 rotations) is counted from immediately after the transition to the production mode. (Variable display of), the remaining number of times is displayed.

  Here, FIG. 46 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the effect of displaying the remaining number of times in the effect mode. (A1) to (A3) in the figure are examples of effects when the effect mode in which the user is currently staying is the special mode. Further, (B1) to (B4) in the figure are examples of effects when the effect mode in which the user is currently staying is the latent probability mode. Although not shown in the drawing, basically, when the presentation mode in which the user is currently staying is the time saving mode or the probability variation mode, basically the same production example as the latent probability mode is obtained.

  In the case where the production mode in which the user is currently staying is the special mode, as shown in (A1) to (A3) in the figure, from the variation display of the first rotation to the variation display of the 20th rotation of this special mode is completed. During the period (from the start to the end of the special mode), the remaining number of times will be displayed. That is, during execution of the special mode, the remaining number of times of the special mode is constantly displayed.

  On the other hand, when the production mode in which the user is currently staying is the latent accuracy mode, the remaining number of latent accuracy modes is displayed until the predetermined number of times of fluctuation display (change display at the 20th rotation) immediately after the transition to the latent accuracy mode. However, the remaining number of latent confirmation modes is displayed from the variation display (variation display of the 21st rotation) after the predetermined number of variations display ends to the end of the latent probability mode. That is, the display of the remaining number of times in the latent probability mode is started after the variable display of the predetermined number of times is completed. Therefore, in the variable display of the predetermined number of times after shifting to the latent probability mode or the like, the remaining number of the latent probability mode is not displayed on the screen, and is hidden from the player. The reason is that originally, while the latent probability mode is being executed, it is a game that mainly performs variable display of the second special symbol. In case of transitioning to the certain mode (when transitioning from the normal game state to the latent probability variation game state), in the few revolutions immediately after the transition to the latent probability mode, the operation suspension of the first special symbol caused during the normal mode It is very likely that the variable display of the first special symbol will be executed by the digestion of the sphere (the operation-holding sphere of the first special symbol carried over from the normal mode to the latent probability mode). When the variation display is executed and the remaining number of latent probability modes is reduced beyond the number of times the variation display of the second special symbol is executed, the remaining number display is contrary to the intention of the player, and the player is displayed. Loss and discomfort to Not sleep. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the remaining number of times of the latent probability mode is not notified immediately after the latent probability mode is started, and the predetermined number of times (20 times) of the fluctuation display is ended in the latent probability mode. It is configured to notify the remaining number of times of the latent probability mode.

  In this modification, "20 times" is set as an example of the predetermined number of times, but the predetermined number of times at least the variable display number (4) corresponding to the maximum value (4) of the number of operation-holding balls of the first special symbol is set ( (4 times) or more is preferable. However, in this embodiment, the specification of the parallel machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are simultaneously performed in parallel is adopted, and while the latent probability mode is being executed, the first special symbol is displayed. While the variable display of special symbols (variable display for a long time) is being performed, the variable display of second special symbols (variable display for a short time) may be performed many times, so the first special symbol In order to ensure the concealment period (predetermined number of times) until all the operation-holding balls are completely consumed, consider the relationship between the variation time of the first special symbol and the variation time of the second special symbol (the first It is preferable to determine the predetermined number of times, in consideration of the variation display number of the second special symbol that can be executed until all the operation-holding balls of one special symbol are exhausted). In the present modification, the remaining number display is displayed small in the upper right of the screen as shown in FIG. 46 (this is referred to as a normal display), but when the remaining number reaches the specified number, The remaining number of times other than the normal display may be displayed (the remaining number of times may be notified in a different manner). As a specific example, when the remaining number of times is "10 times", a special display of "10 times remaining" is added to the normal display in the center of the screen (in a display mode larger than the display on the upper right side). You may display simultaneously. After that, until the remaining number is exhausted, not only the normal display but also the special display is displayed at the same time for each change, such as "9 remaining", "8 remaining", ..., "0 remaining". May be. Also, in the current gaming state, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the special symbol of the one that does not become the main subject of the game has stopped fluctuating and there is no operation hold ball for that special symbol Alternatively, the remaining number may be displayed on the screen. That is, in this modified example, the remaining number of time saving game state (low probability low base state), latent probability variation game state (high probability low base state), probability variation game state (high probability high base state) is the first It is preferable to display the remaining number of times on the condition that the special symbol has stopped fluctuating and the operation-holding ball of the first special symbol does not exist.

  As described above, according to the present modified example, when the normal game state is shifted to the advantageous game state, the advantageous game state is ended in the variable display of the special symbol for a predetermined number of times from immediately after entering the game state. By configuring so as not to notify the remaining number of times until, originally, during the advantageous game state, the variable display of the second special symbol becomes the main subject of the game, and the first special symbol that occurs during the normal game state Disadvantageous information for the player that the operation reserve ball is displayed during the advantageous game state and the first special symbol is variably displayed, and the remaining number of times until the advantageous game state is ended is subtracted. Is not disclosed, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to feel a sense of discomfort or distrust of the progress processing of the game and the notification effect thereof, and as a result, it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

<Modification 2 of the first embodiment>
In this modified example, as the external information signal output from the external information terminal board 600, a predetermined external information signal indicating that the probability variation game state has changed to the latent probability variation game state is provided. In this modified example, the result of the determination of whether or not the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit, and when a predetermined specific big hit is won as the big hit type, it is counted from immediately after the end of the big hit game, and the first special The probability variation game state (high probability high base state) is set until the total of the variable display times of the symbol and the second special symbol reaches a predetermined number (100 times). Then, when the total of the variable display times of the first special symbol and the second special symbol reaches the predetermined number (100 times), the next big hit does not occur, and when the variable display of the predetermined number of times ends, The next fluctuation display (101st fluctuation display) shifts to the latent probability variation game state. At this time, from the end of the predetermined number of fluctuation display in the probability variation game state or the start of the first fluctuation display in the latent probability variation game state to the end of the latent probability variation game state, the predetermined external information signal is output on. It

<Modification 3 of the first embodiment>
In this modified example, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, if the variation display of one special symbol is the big hit variation display, and the variation display of the other special symbol is the variation display of the small hit, one Under the situation where the big hit variation display of the special symbol and the small hit variation display of the other special symbol are executed in parallel, before the big hit variation display of one special symbol ends, the small variation of the other special symbol When the hit variation display ends, the small hit variation display of the other special symbol ends or the small hit game is executed, and the big hit variation display of one special symbol deviates and is forced to the variation display. To end. In other words, for one of the special symbols, even when the result of the hit / miss determination is a big hit, the shift is replaced when the variable display is stopped. In addition, it is preferable that the jackpot variation display of the one special symbol is a variation display that is executed upon the occasion of falling into a predetermined jackpot among a plurality of jackpot types (variation display that triggers execution of a predetermined jackpot game). Is. Therefore, if it is a big hit other than the predetermined big hit among a plurality of big hit types, like the above embodiment, from the end of the small hit variation display of the other special symbol until the end of the small hit game, one of them The special jackpot variation display is interrupted (variation time measurement is interrupted).

<Modification 4 of the first embodiment>
In this modified example, a variation effect of a decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol, and a variation effect of a decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol. Is displayed in parallel on the screen of the effect display device 70, while the first decorative symbol is variably displayed in a manner synchronized or linked with the variable display of the first special symbol, and the variable display of the second special symbol is synchronized or The second decorative pattern is variably displayed in an interlocking manner. At this time, when the variable display of the second special symbol is the big hit variable display, and the variable display of the first special symbol is the small hit variable display or the deviating fluctuation display, the small hit variation display or the deviating fluctuation of the first special symbol is displayed. Under the situation where the display and the big hit variation display of the second special symbol are executed in parallel, the big hit variation display of the second special symbol is completed before the small hit variation display or the outlying variation display of the first special symbol is finished. When is finished, even before the measured time of the variable display of the second special symbol reaches the preset variable time (variable time as designed) which is preset, the big hit variable display of the second special symbol At the end of, the small hit variation display or the out-of-range variation display of the first special symbol is forcibly terminated as the out-of-range variation display in synchronization with or in synchronization with it. Therefore, on the screen, the "big hit symbol combination" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol combination of the second decorative symbol, and the "outlier symbol combination" is stopped and displayed as the stop symbol combination of the first decorative symbol. At this time, according to the display mode of the stop symbol combination of the first decorative symbol (offset symbol combination), the stop symbol combination of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed in the jackpot symbol combination, after the jackpot game is executed. , The latent probability change game state (small hit RUSH mode) is configured to have different expectations. Specifically, as the stop symbol combination of the first decorative symbol, if it is the outlier symbol combination A (for example, the order of "1, 2, 3," etc.), the expectation of the plunge into the latent probability variation gaming state is high. If it is a deviating symbol combination B (for example, "1/3/8" or the like), the expectation of entry into the latent probability variation gaming state is set to a low expectation. Incidentally, when the outlier symbol combination A is stopped and displayed, the specification may be such that the transition to the latent probability variation game state is definite.

  Further, in this modified example, when the variable display of the special symbol of the first special symbol is the big hit variation display and the variable display of the second special symbol is the small hit variation display, the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is In the situation where the small hit variation display of the second special symbol is executed in parallel, before the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, when the small hit variation display of the second special symbol is finished, From the time when the small hit variation display of the second special symbol ends until the small hit game ends, the big hit variation display of the first special symbol will be suspended, but the big hit variation of this first special symbol A predetermined image (for example, a message "Variation is suspended") is displayed while the display is suspended, and a stop symbol combination of the first special symbol is displayed according to the display mode (for example, display color) of the predetermined image. Is a big hit pattern combination stop table After completion of the jackpot gaming executed by the fact that the may be configured to expectation to rush into latent probability variation gaming state (Koatari RUSH mode) is different.

<Modification 5 of the first embodiment>
In this modified example, when the condition device is actuated when the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the player is instructed to pass the game ball through the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92. The winning combination operation gate passage instruction effect is executed. The winning combination operation gate passage instruction effect, after the variable display of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the big hit symbol (after the condition device operates), the game balls that have passed to the winning combination operation gates 91 and 92 are the combined winning operation gates. It is executed until the switches 911 and 921 detect it (until the accessory continuous operation device starts its operation). As this combination operation gate passage instruction effect, for example, "Please aim at the combination operation gate", a message indicating that the game ball should be shot toward the combination operation gates 91 and 92 is displayed on the screen. To do. Further, in the combination operation gate passage instruction effect, a sound corresponding to the contents of the screen display is simultaneously output from the speaker 11 in accordance with the screen display. Therefore, in the combination operation operation gate passage instruction effect, the player is alerted by both the image display and the sound.

  At this time, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state) and the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, and the gaming state is the normal gaming state (low probability low base state) ), When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the effect mode (screen display, voice) of the combination operation gate passage instruction effect may be different. That is, there are a production mode of the winning combination operation gate passage instruction effect that is executed when the first hit occurs and a production aspect of the winning combination operation gate passage instruction effect that is executed when the so-called accident hit occurs. Are preferably different.

  Also, when the game state is a normal game state (low probability low base state), when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the game state is a probability variation game state (high probability high base state). When the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol, the effect mode (screen display, voice) of the combination operation gate passage instruction effect may be different. That is, the production mode of the winning combination operation gate passage instruction effect that is executed when a so-called accident hit occurs, and the production mode of the winning combination operation gate passage instruction effect that is executed when a big hit of a long-resort occurs. It is preferable that the aspect is different.

<Modification 6 of the first embodiment>
In this modified example, "a sudden big hit" is provided as the big hit type of the second special symbol, and the opening pattern of the big winning hole 54 in the big hit game is approximately the same as or close to the opening pattern of the big winning hole 54 in the small hit game. I shall. For example, if the opening pattern of the big winning hole 54 in the small hit game is "open for about 1.8 seconds x 1 time", the opening pattern of the big winning hole 54 in each round game of the big hit game is also "about 1. 8 seconds open x 1 time ". Therefore, for example, in the jackpot game that is executed upon winning the sudden jackpot in N rounds, the opening pattern of "opening for about 1.8 seconds x 1 time" is performed over N rounds (N times). Become. As a result, the big hit game and the small hit game can be played with a game with an apparently similar opening time and opening pattern, and the big hit game in the case of a latent big hit occurs as multiple small hit games (N times). It can be simulated.

<Modification 7 of the first embodiment>
In this modified example, unlike the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment (number-of-times-probability variable machine), the probability variation function of the special symbol is configured as a normal probability machine that continues from the end of the big hit game until the next big hit occurs. Has been done. Therefore, (1) when the gaming state after the jackpot game is over, shifts to the probability variation gaming state (high probability high base state), the probability variation times, the variation time shortening times, and the easy entry state times are “∞ times (65535 times). ) ”Is set, and (2) when the gaming state after the big hit game ends shifts to the latent probability variation gaming state (high-probability low base state),“ ∞ times (65535 times) ”is set as the probability fluctuation times and fluctuation time shortening times. , "0 times" is set as the number of easy-to-enter states, and (3) when the game state after the big hit game ends shifts to a shorter working time state (low probability high base state), the number of times the variable time is shortened and easy to enter The number of states is set to "70 times" and the number of probability changes is set to "0", and (4) the number of probability changes when the game state after the big hit game transitions to the normal game state (low probability low base state) , Weird "0 times" is set as a time shorter times and ball entrance easily state number. Therefore, regarding the transition control of the gaming state, basically, except that the number of continuation of the probability variation game state and the latent probability variation game state is changed from "100 times" to "∞ times (65535 times)", This is similar to that of the first embodiment.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the second embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the second embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, parts having the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted, and different points will be mainly described. That is, in the following description, a configuration common to that of the first embodiment can be applied, except for special cases.

  FIG. 47 is a front view of the pachinko game machine of the second embodiment. On the front surface of the game board 20, an outer rail 41 and an inner rail 42 are fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which a game ball can roll is defined. A center ornament 21 is provided in the approximate center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the center opening of the center ornament 21. In addition, the game area PA is based on the center decoration 21 in the substantially center, a left area PA1 which is an area on the left side of the center decoration 21 (a board surface area corresponding to left-handing), and an area on the right side of the center decoration 21 (right-handing). And a right side area PA2 which is a board surface area corresponding to. At the upper part of the center ornament 21, an introduction passage 44 connecting the left side area PA1 and the right side area PA2 is provided, so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through the introduction passage 44 and reach the right side area PA2. ing.

  In the area below the center ornament 21, the left first starting port 51A is arranged. The left first starting opening 51A is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and is provided with a first starting opening switch 511A for detecting entry of a game ball. The left first starting opening 51A is a normally open type winning opening that is opened upward, and mainly allows a game ball (left-handed game ball) flowing down the left side area PA1 to enter. The entry of the game ball into the left first starting opening 51A triggers the first special symbol lottery.

  The right first starting opening 51B is arranged in the area on the right side of the center decoration 21 (right side area PA2). The right first starting opening 51B is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, like the above-mentioned left first starting opening 51A, and is a first starting for detecting the entrance of a game ball. The mouth switch 511B is provided. The right first starting opening 51B is a normally open type winning opening that is opened upward, and mainly allows game balls (right-handed game balls) flowing down the right side area PA2 to enter. Entering the game ball into the right first starting opening 51B is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery.

  Here, above the right side area PA2, a right side flow path 45 through which the game balls that have passed through the communication passage 44 flow down is formed. The right flow passage 45 is defined between the outer rail 41 and the right wall portion of the center decoration 21, and is formed to have a flow passage width narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball and allowing the game balls to pass in only one row. There is. The right side channel 45 communicates with the first branch channel 46 and the second branch channel 47. The first branch flow channel 46 is formed along the outer edge of the right wall portion of the center decoration 21, and the second branch flow channel 47 is formed along the outer edge of the outer rail 41. The first branch flow path 46 and the second branch flow path 47 are both formed with a flow path width that allows the game balls to flow down, and the game balls that have passed through the right side flow path 45 are the first branch flow paths 46 or It is designed to flow into the second branch flow path 47. Between the first branch flow path 46 and the second branch flow path 47, the game ball flowing down the right flow path 45 is selectively supplied to either the first branch flow path 46 or the second branch flow path 47. A distribution member 48 for distribution is provided.

  The distribution member 48 has a closed position in which a tip portion (upper end portion) is directed substantially vertically upward with a support shaft extending substantially orthogonal to the board surface of the game board 20 and closing the first branch flow path 46, The tip portion (upper end portion) is attached so as to be swingable between an open position in which the first branch flow path 46 is opened by pointing diagonally upward to the right. Although not shown in the drawing, the distribution member 48 is connected to a solenoid as a driving means, and the solenoid is energized / de-energized to control the plunger to expand / contract to drive the surface substantially parallel to the board surface of the game board 20. The rocking control is carried out between the closed position and the open position. The solenoid is electrically connected to the main control board 100 and is drive-controlled based on a drive signal output from the main control board 100. The distribution member 48 is driven to an open position or a closed position at predetermined time intervals according to a predetermined drive pattern set in advance. Specifically, the distribution member 48 alternately repeats opening for 0.1 seconds and closing for 1.9 seconds (opening time: closing time = 1: 19). Therefore, about 5% (1/20) of the game balls flowing down the right side area PA2 flow down the first branch flow path 46, and about 95% (19/20) of the game balls second branch. It is designed to flow down the flow path 47. The distribution ratio of the game balls can be set arbitrarily, and for example, the first branch flow path 46 and the first branch flow path 46 and the first ratio can be set at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 1: 1 or 1: 2, 2: 1). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the two branch channels 47 are selectively distributed. Further, the distribution member 48 is not electrically driven, and is oscillated between the open position and the closed position by the action of the weight of the game ball and the ball pressure, and the game ball is in the first branch flow path. 46 or the second branch flow channel 47 may be used.

  The right first start port 51B is provided downstream of the first branch flow path 46, and the game ball flowing down the first branch flow path 46 is configured to enter the right first start port 51B. ing. On the other hand, an operation gate 53, a special winning opening 54, and a second starting opening 52 are provided downstream of the second branch flow path 47.

  The operation gate 53 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and is provided with an operation gate switch 531 for detecting passage of a game ball. The passage of the game ball to the actuation gate 53 is a trigger for the ordinary symbol lottery for determining whether to open the second starting opening 52.

  The special winning opening 54 is formed as a horizontal rectangular winning opening that is opened when the winning / winning lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The special winning opening 54 is a special winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a big winning for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. And a mouth solenoid 543. The special electric accessory 542 is changed into an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the special winning opening 54. In the special game (big hit game, small hit game), when the game ball is shot, by hitting the right side area PA2, that is, by so-called right hitting, it becomes easy to enter the special winning opening 54. There is.

  The special electric accessory 542 includes a front-rear slide type movable member 544 for opening and closing the special winning opening 54. The movable member 544 closes the special winning opening 54 to make it impossible or difficult to enter the game ball, and the movable member 544 opens the special winning opening 54 to allow or facilitate the entry of the game ball. It is slidable in the front-back direction (direction orthogonal to the board surface) between the open position (retracted position). The upper surface of the movable member 544 has a passage width of about one game ball or more in the front-rear direction, and is formed to incline downward from the right side to the left side in a front view. Therefore, when the movable member 544 is in the closed position (when the special winning opening 54 is in the closed state), the game ball can flow down using the upper surface of the movable member 544 as a guideway, and on the guideway from right to left. And falls from the left end of the special electric accessory 542 (flows toward the second starting port 52).

  The second starting opening 52 is arranged diagonally below and to the left of the special electric accessory 542, and when the special electric accessory 542 is in the closed position (when the special winning opening 54 is in the closed state), The game ball that has passed through the upper surface of the electric accessory 542 will flow down toward the second starting port 52, and if the second starting port 52 is open at that time, the gaming ball will move to the second starting port 52. It is easy to enter. On the other hand, when the movable member 544 is in the open position (when the second starting opening 52 is in the open state), it is extremely easy for the game ball flowing down the second downflow passage to enter the special winning opening 54. Has become. In the present embodiment, the game balls flowing down the second flow-down passage have a board surface design (gauge design) that flows toward the special winning opening 54 (ordinary electric accessory 522) with an extremely high probability. When 54 is closed, the game ball is guided to the upper surface of the movable member 544 and flows down toward the second starting port 52, while when the special winning opening 54 is open, the game ball is the large winning opening. It is configured so as not to enter the ball 54 and reach the second starting opening 52.

  The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is provided with a second starting port switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The second starting opening 51 is disposed in the right side area PA2 which is a board surface area corresponding to right-handedness, and a game ball (a right-handed game ball) flowing mainly down the right-hand side area PA2 can enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52 is a trigger for the second special symbol lottery. The second starting port 52 includes an ordinary electric accessory 522, which is generally referred to as an electric chu, and an ordinary electric accessory solenoid 523 for opening and closing the ordinary electric accessory 522. The ordinary electric accessory 522 is changed into an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the second starting opening 52. In other words, the ordinary electric auditors' 522 structure is such that the game ball does not easily enter the second starting opening 52 unless it is displaced to the open state, and is opened at a predetermined trigger (trigger to win the normal symbol lottery). If so, the ease of entering the game ball is increased.

  In the second embodiment configured in this way, from the same purpose as in the first embodiment described above, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the left side area PA1 becomes the main area of the game, and the gaming state is the advantageous game. In the case of the state (time saving game state, latent probability variation game state, probability variation game state), the right side area PA2 is the main area of the game. At this time, two starting ports 51B, 52 (right first starting port 51B, second starting port 52) are arranged in the right side area PA, and when a game ball is shot aiming at the right side area PA2, The game ball is selectively sorted into a downflow path toward the right first start opening 51B and a downflow path toward the second start opening 52 according to the operating position (open position, closed position) of the distribution member 48. . Therefore, when the game state is an advantageous game state (time saving game state, latent probability variation game state, probability variation game state), the game ball is inserted into the first starting port 51B or the second starting port 52 by right-handing, It becomes a game property that the determination of win / fail of the first special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol) and the determination of win / fail of the second special symbol (variable display of the second special symbol) are executed concurrently. That is, when the game state is an advantageous game state, during the variable display of one special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the variable display of the other special symbol is configured to be easily performed. (Variable display of the first special symbol and variable display of the second special symbol are likely to be performed simultaneously in parallel).

  Note that, as a modification thereof, among a plurality of types of advantageous game states, when the predetermined advantageous game state (for example, latent probability variation game state), the distribution member 48 is driven to move the game ball to the right first. While selectively flowing down to the starting opening 51B side or the second starting opening 52 side, in the case of other advantageous game states (for example, time saving game state, probability variation game state), the sorting member 48 is not driven, The game ball may be always made to flow down to the second starting opening 52 side.

  In the pachinko game machine PM of the second embodiment having such a configuration, various game effects are configured to be controlled and executed by the effect control board 200 according to the progress status of the game and the like. Of the various game effects, the main effect contents in the latent accuracy mode (small hit RUSH mode) will be described below.

<Invincible zone production>
The invincible zone effect in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 48 is a time chart of invincible zone production. The invincible zone effect is an advantageous state for the player by switching to a special background image different from normal during the big hit variation display which is performed when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit ( It is an effect that suggests or informs that it is an invincible zone).

  First, when the game state is the latent probability variation game state, as described above, the latent probability selection state is set as the variation pattern selection state corresponding to this latency probability variation game state. When the variation pattern selection state is set to the latent probability selection state, the variation pattern of the special symbol is selected with reference to the variation pattern table 4 shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 13, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the variation time of the special symbol is set to an extremely long time (10 minutes). The pattern PA4-4 is selected. At this time, while the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is being performed, the hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit non-lottery state, and the big hit is derived as a result of the hit determination of the second special symbol. Only small hits or outliers will be derived. Here, if the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, as a variation pattern of the second special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely short time (0.5 seconds). When the variation pattern PHA4-1 is selected, and the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is off, as the variation pattern of the second special symbol, the variation time of the second special symbol is extremely short (1 second. The fluctuation pattern PH4-1 set to () is selected. Therefore, while the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol is being performed, the variation display of the second special symbol is quickly exhausted, and it is possible to make a winning / decision determination (lottery) about several hundred times for the second special symbol. Becomes

  As described above, when the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state, the winning probability of the jackpot is set to a high probability (about 1/80), and normally, until the above-mentioned hundreds of variations are displayed. There is a very high possibility that the next big hit will occur during the period (there is a very high possibility that the small hit RUSH mode will end accordingly). The "end of the small hit RUSH mode" also includes the end of the small hit RUSH mode (probability of latent change game state) once. In other words, when the big hit that triggers the transition to the latent probability variation game state is won, the big hit game is started, so the big hit game state (normal game state / low probability low base state) is set once. After the jackpot game is over, it will enter the latent probability variation game state again, and in that case, it can be said that the latent probability variation game state ends "once". However, during the execution of the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol, the jackpot is in a lottery state in the hit determination of the second special symbol, and the jackpot of the second special symbol is not derived (the small hit RUSH mode is Since it does not end), in the above-mentioned variable display of hundreds of times, a small bonus can be made to appear almost unlimitedly (the number of balls can be increased by frequent occurrences of small hit games). Can be given to.

  Therefore, in the second embodiment, when the production mode currently staying is the latent probability mode, the jackpot variation display of the first special symbol which is executed when the result of the hit / miss determination of the first special symbol is a big hit In the invincible zone effect that suggests or informs that the latent mode (small hit RUSH mode) does not end in the middle during execution of the variable display (in a state advantageous to the player). Is configured to be executable.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the invincible zone effect is executed from the start of the big hit variation display of the first special symbol to the end of the big hit variation display. That is, the invincible zone effect is to be executed during the period when the hit determination of the second special symbol is controlled to the big hit no lottery state. During the execution of the invincible zone effect, only the small hit or out is derived as a result of the hit determination of the second special symbol, and as the variable display of the second special symbol, only the variable display of the small hit or the variable display of the out is executed. It

  FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram showing a basic screen of the invincible zone effect. When the invincible zone effect is started, the background image displayed on the screen of the effect display device 70 is switched from the background image dedicated to the latent probability mode to the background image dedicated to the invincible zone. While the invincible zone effect is being executed, a band image 721 in which the characters "ZONE" are shown at the left and right edges of the screen is displayed as the background display (the background image that is the back display of the decorative pattern). Thereby, the player is informed or notified that the current state of the game has entered the invincible zone. Then, triggered by the end of the big hit variation display of the first special symbol, the invincible zone effect ends (the latent probability mode ends), and the big hit game starts.

  While the special zone effect is being executed, the background image is switched to the special background image as described above, and the display mode of the decorative pattern variation effect (reach effect, etc.), the notice effect, and the look-ahead notice effect are also special. A special display mode dedicated to the zone effect may be used.

<Remaining fluctuation time notification production>
Next, the remaining variation time notification effect in the second embodiment will be described. The remaining variation time notification effect, when the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state, the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, which is performed when the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is displayed, This is an effect that notifies the remaining time (referred to as “remaining fluctuation time”) until the big hit fluctuation display is finished. On the remaining time display portion 722 (see FIG. 49 above) provided on the screen of the effect display device 70, the remaining fluctuation time until the big hit fluctuation display of the first special symbol is finished is displayed in a countdown format. In addition, during the big hit variation display of the first special symbol, it is a big hit non-lottery state in which it is forbidden to derive the big hit as a result of the hit determination of the second special symbol, and the above-mentioned invincible zone effect is executed. Becomes Therefore, it can be said that the remaining variation time informs the remaining time until the invincible zone ends.

  The remaining fluctuation time is managed based on the timed value of the effect time timer provided in the effect control unit 220 of the effect control board 200. In this effect time timer, a prescribed fluctuation time determined according to the fluctuation pattern of the first special symbol is set as an initial value. That is, the specified fluctuation time means the fluctuation time specified in the fluctuation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 10 to 14. Therefore, when the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state, if the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, as defined in the variation pattern table of FIG. 13, the variation of the first special symbol The time is "10 minutes". Therefore, when the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is started, "10 minutes" is set as the initial value in the effect time timer. The time value of the effect time timer is subtracted with the passage of time from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and becomes "0" when the variable display of the first special symbol ends. Reach In addition, the effect time timer starts timing when the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control board 100 is received.

  Here, while the big hit variation display of the first special symbol is being performed, when the small hit game is executed by the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol being a small hit, it is provided on the main control board 100 side. The timekeeping process by the special symbol game timer that is performed and the timekeeping process by the effect time timer provided on the effect control board 200 side are different controls. The special symbol game timer includes a first special symbol game timer and a second special symbol game timer. Hereinafter, the time counting process of each timer will be described.

(Timekeeping process of special symbol game timer)
FIG. 50 is a time chart for explaining a variation interruption process of a special symbol. As described above, during the variable display of one special symbol of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the small hit game is executed when the result of the hit determination of the other special symbol is a small hit. If done, from the time when the small hit game is started until the end of the small hit game, the variable display of one special symbol is interrupted. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 50, during the variation display of the big hit of the first special symbol, if the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, the small hit game is executed, the small hit Until the winning game ends, the variable display of the big hit of the first special symbol is interrupted. In other words, while the small hit game is being executed, the variable display of the first special symbol will be interrupted (the execution time of the small hit game = the suspension time of the variable display of the first special symbol). Thereby, the special symbol game timer provided on the main control board 100, until the end of the small hit game until the end, suspends (temporarily stops) the measurement of the variation time of the first special symbol. Then, when the small hit game is over, the special symbol game timer restarts measuring the variation time of the first special symbol, and the measurement time of the variation time before the restart and the measurement time of the variation time after the restart When the total time reaches the preset specified variation time (variation time according to the design value), the variation display of the first special symbol is ended. In addition, in this example, the execution time of the small hit game is set to "3 seconds". The execution time of the small hit game is a time obtained by adding together the small hit start demonstration time, one round time, and the small hit end demo time.

(Performance time timer timing processing)
On the other hand, the production time timer, during the variable display of the first special symbol, if the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit, when the small hit game is executed, the execution of the small hit game The time (time when the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted) is added to the timekeeping value as an additional time, and the timekeeping is continued even during the execution of the small hit game. Specifically, the effect time timer, during the variable display of the first special symbol, if the small hit game of the second special symbol occurs, the time of "3 seconds" assigned as the execution time of the small hit game. Continues the clock as it is with the added value. As a result, the execution time (3 seconds) of the small hit game is added to the effect time timer each time the small hit game occurs. Along with this, also for the remaining fluctuation time displayed on the screen, a time value of "3 seconds" is additionally displayed every time a small hit game occurs, corresponding to the time value of the effect time timer. Hereinafter, this time value additional display effect is also referred to as "timer additional effect". Therefore, in this remaining fluctuation time notification effect, the remaining fluctuation time until the fluctuation display of the big hit of the first special symbol is finished is increased or decreased in a staging manner, and the remaining fluctuation time is artificially extended by the occurrence of the timer addition effect. The more you win, the more you can raise the expectation of winning coins from the small hit game.

  Next, an example of the remaining variation time notification effect will be described. FIG. 51 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the remaining variation time notification effect. In addition, on the screen, the effect related to the second special symbol game (the variable effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol) which is the main body of the game in this latent probability mode is displayed. In addition, in the figure, in order to facilitate understanding of this example of performance, the time value of the special symbol game timer and the time value of the effect time timer are added to the right of each screen display.

  As shown in (A) in the figure, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started with the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol being a big hit, the timed value of the effect time timer is displayed on the screen. The time corresponding to is displayed as the remaining fluctuation time. At this point, "10:00" is displayed in the remaining variation time on the screen as a time value corresponding to the initial value of the effect time timer. The effect time timer is updated every time the effect control side timer interrupt process is executed (every interrupt period), but the display of the remaining variation time on the screen is updated in units of 1 second.

  As shown in (B) in the figure, when 1 second elapses after the variation display of the first special symbol is started, 1 second is subtracted from the initial value, and the remaining variation time displayed on the screen is “9”. Minutes 59 seconds ". In this way, the remaining fluctuation time displayed in the remaining time display area 722 is “10 minutes 00 seconds” → “9 minutes 59 seconds” → “9 minutes 58 seconds” → ... → “0 as time passes. Minutes 00 seconds "and so on. In the figure (B), as the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, the outlier symbol combination (“1-5-8”) is stopped and displayed.

  As shown in (C) in the figure, when 2 seconds have passed since the variation display of the first special symbol was started, 2 seconds are subtracted from the initial value, and the remaining variation time is updated to "9 minutes 58 seconds". To be done. In the figure, the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a small hit, and after the variable display for an extremely short time (0.5 seconds), the small hit symbol combination (“3-3 -7 ") is stopped. At this moment, the time value of the special symbol game counter and the time value of the effect time counter are the same.

  As shown in (D) in the figure, when 3 seconds have passed since the variation display of the first special symbol was started (the original variation time on the screen is updated to "9 minutes 57 seconds"). When the small hit game is started, the variable display of the first special symbol is suspended until the small hit game is finished. Therefore, the special symbol game timer, from the start of the small hit game, until the end of the small hit game, the time is temporarily stopped. On the other hand, the production time timer does not temporarily stop the time counting even during the small hitting game, and “3 seconds” which is the execution time of the small hitting game is added as the additional time, and then the time keeping is continued. Therefore, the remaining fluctuation time displayed on the screen is increased from "9 minutes 57 seconds" to "10 minutes 00 seconds" by adding "3 seconds" as the execution time of the small hit game. Therefore, the time value of the effect time timer (remaining change time display on the screen) is increased by 3 seconds, which is the additional time, compared with the time value of the special symbol game timer. Thereby, for the purpose of seeing the variation time of the first special symbol, it is extended for 3 seconds. In this way, by adding the extra time corresponding to the execution time of the small hit game, it is possible to obtain a feeling of payout in proportion to the extra time, and at the same time the end time of the small hit RUSH mode is postponed. The player's feelings can be further enhanced.

  As shown in (E) in the figure, when 6 seconds have passed since the variation display of the first special symbol was started (when the small hit game was finished), the remaining variation time is updated to "9 minutes 57 seconds". To be done. That is, the production time timer keeps the time count for 3 seconds corresponding to the additional time (the execution time of the small hit game), so that the time count value becomes "9 minutes 57 seconds". On the other hand, the special symbol game timer, as a result of interrupting the time measurement from the start to the end of the small hit game, the time value becomes "9 minutes 57 seconds". As a result, at the end of this small hit game, the time value of the special symbol game timer and the time value of the effect time timer coincide with each other, and the remaining variation time of the first special symbol, the actual remaining time and the effect There will be no discrepancy with the remaining time.

  As shown in (F) in the figure, when 7 seconds have passed since the variation display of the first special symbol was started, the remaining variation time is updated to "9 minutes 56 seconds". After that, each time the small hit game is executed with the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol being a small hit, 3 seconds are added to the remaining fluctuation time display on the screen, and this addition time ( It is possible to obtain a feeling of payout according to the variable display extension time). Further, until the remaining variation time displayed on the screen becomes “0”, it is possible to recognize that the latent mode continues, so that it is possible to eliminate the anxiety of not knowing how long the latent mode will continue. be able to. As a modification thereof, the remaining variable time display may be added only after the small hit game is executed a plurality of times during the execution of the long time variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, each time the small hit game is executed, it is not added for 3 seconds, but for example, until the small hit is executed 10 times, the additional effect is not executed. When the lottery is executed, the production may be performed by adding 30 seconds (3 seconds × 10 times = 30 seconds) to one episode at that time.

  As described above, according to the second embodiment, while the small hit RUSH mode is being executed, the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit (so-called accident hit), and as a variation display of the big hit of the first special symbol. When the long-term variable display (long variable display) is executed, while the long-term variable display is being executed, the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a small hit or a limitation that only the outlier is derived, While this long-time variable display is being executed, by performing an invincible zone effect that suggests or informs that it is in an advantageous state for the player, the time scale of the long-time variable display is executed during execution of this invincible zone effect. It is possible to expect a grouped ball according to the above, and to give the player a sense of security that the small hit RUSH mode will not end halfway, so the player can fully enjoy the small hit RUSH mode. Can, as a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, according to the second embodiment, during the execution of the small hit RUSH mode, while the variable display of the big hit of the first special symbol is being performed based on the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol being the big hit. In the case where the small hit game is executed based on the result of the judgment result of the second special symbol being a small hit, the variable display of the first special symbol is interrupted during the execution of the small hit game ( When the information display related to the remaining time until the fluctuation display is finished is rendered by using the constraint of (temporarily stopping the measurement of the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation display), the fluctuation display is interrupted. By notifying the remaining time in the form of adding the time value, the more the remaining time increases due to the occurrence of a small hit game, the more fully the player can feel the ball thrown out and the continuous feeling of small hits. Can be made Do effect with a payout feeling can be performed). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 1 of the second embodiment>
In the second embodiment, when the gaming state is a latent probability variation gaming state, if the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, it always changes regardless of the big hit type (big hit symbol type). The variation pattern PA4-4 set to a long time (10 minutes) is selected, and the invincible zone effect and the timer addition effect are executed during the big hit variation display of the first special symbol. However, the present invention is not limited to this configuration, and when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, a different change pattern (change time) can be selected according to the big hit type, and a specific change Only when the pattern is selected, the invincible zone effect and the timer addition effect are executed during the big hit variation display of the first special symbol (during variation display based on a specific variation pattern). Sea urchin may be configured. It is preferable that this specific variation pattern is a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is set to an extremely long time (for example, 10 minutes). On the other hand, other non-specific fluctuation patterns are preferably fluctuation patterns set to a time (for example, 1 minute) in which the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is relatively shorter than the specific fluctuation pattern. is there.

  Specifically, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, if the big hit type is a big hit that triggers a transition to a normal game state, a time saving game state or a probability variation game state, the first special As the variation pattern of the symbol, a specific variation pattern set for an extremely long time (10 minutes) is selected, and the invincible zone effect and the timer addition effect are executed during the big hit variation display of the first special symbol. . According to the configuration, when the invincible zone effect and the remaining variation time notification effect are executed during the big hit variation display of the first special symbol, the latent latent change game state (small hit RUSH mode) is re-established after the end of the big hit game. Although the player does not rush into the game, the small hit RUSH mode does not end during the execution of the effect, so that the player can fully enjoy the small hit RUSH mode during that time.

  On the other hand, when the result of the hit determination of the first special symbol is a big hit, only when the big hit type is a big hit that triggers the transition to the latent probability variation gaming state, as a variation pattern of the first special symbol, an extremely long time The specific variation pattern set to (10 minutes) may be selected, and the invincible zone effect and the remaining variation time notification effect may be executed during the big hit variation display of the first special symbol. According to the configuration, when the invincible zone effect and the timer addition effect are executed during the big hit variation display of the first special symbol, an increase in the number of coins can be obtained due to the frequent occurrence of the small hit game during the execution of the effect. Since it is possible to give the player the privilege and the privilege of re-entering the latent probability variation game state even after the end of the big hit game, the player can be provided with the invincible zone effect and the timer addition effect. It is possible to further raise expectations.

[Third Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the third embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, parts having the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted, and different points will be mainly described. That is, in the following description, a configuration common to that of the first embodiment can be applied, except for special cases.

  FIG. 52 is a front view of the pachinko game machine according to the third embodiment. On the front surface of the game board 20, an outer rail 41 and an inner rail 42 are fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which a game ball can roll is defined. A center ornament 21 is provided in the approximate center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the center opening of the center ornament 21. In addition, the game area PA is based on the center decoration 21 in the substantially center, a left area PA1 which is an area on the left side of the center decoration 21 (a board surface area corresponding to left-handing), and an area on the right side of the center decoration 21 (right-handing). And a right side area PA2 which is a board surface area corresponding to. At the upper part of the center ornament 21, an introduction passage 44 connecting the left side area PA1 and the right side area PA2 is provided, so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through the introduction passage 44 and reach the right side area PA2. ing.

  An upper first starting opening 51A is arranged in a region below the center ornament 21. The upper first starting opening 51A is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and is provided with a first starting opening switch 511A for detecting the entry of a game ball. The upper first starting opening 51A is a normally open type winning opening that is opened upward, and mainly allows a game ball (left-handed game ball) flowing down the left side area PA1 to enter. The entry of the game ball into the upper first starting opening 51A triggers the first special symbol lottery.

  The lower first starting port 51B is arranged below the upper first starting port 51A. The lower first starting opening 51B, like the above-mentioned first starting opening 51A, is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and is mainly a left-side area PA1 flowing down game ball (left hit). A game ball) can be entered. The entry of the game ball into the lower first starting opening 51B is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery. The lower first starting opening 51B drives a second starting opening switch 511B for detecting the entry of a game ball, a normal electric accessory 512 generally called a power chu, and an opening / closing operation of the normal electric accessory 512. A normal electric accessory solenoid 513 for The normal electric auditors product 512 is changed to an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the lower first starting opening 51B. That is, the normal electric auditors product 512 has a structure in which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the lower first starting opening 51B unless it is displaced to the open state, and the predetermined trigger described later (trigger to win the normal symbol lottery). With the open state, it becomes easier to enter the game ball.

  An operation gate 53 is arranged on the left side of the lower first starting opening 51B. The operation gate 53 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to a normal symbol game, and is provided with an operation gate switch 531 for detecting passage of a game ball. The passage of the game ball to the operation gate 53 is a trigger for the ordinary symbol lottery for determining whether or not to open the lower first starting opening 51B.

  The second starting port 52 is arranged in the area on the right side of the center ornament 21 (right side area PA2), and the special winning opening 54 is arranged diagonally below and to the left. The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is provided with a second starting port switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The second starting opening 52 is a normally open type winning opening that is opened upward, and mainly allows a game ball (right-handed game ball) flowing down the right side area PA2 to enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52 is a trigger for the second special symbol lottery.

  The special winning opening 54 is formed as a horizontal rectangular winning opening that is opened when the winning / winning lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The special winning opening 54 is a special winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a big winning for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. And a mouth solenoid 543. The special electric accessory 542 is changed into an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the special winning opening 54. In the special game (big hit game, small hit game), when the game ball is shot, by hitting the right side area PA2, that is, by so-called right hitting, it becomes easy to enter the special winning opening 54. There is.

  In the third embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 can mainly enter either the upper first starting opening 51A, the lower first starting opening 51B (ordinary electric accessory 512), or the operating gate 53. is there. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can mainly enter the second starting opening 52 or the special winning opening 54.

  Subsequently, a game state in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment, as a plurality of types of game states, a normal game state, a time saving game state, a latent probability variation game state, and a probability variation game state are set.

  FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram showing a game state setting table in the third embodiment. In the gaming state setting table, for each jackpot type (type of symbol group), the gaming state to be shifted after the jackpot game is finished is set. The big hit type (type of symbol group) of the third embodiment is the same as the big hit type (type of symbol group) of the first embodiment, and as the big hit type (type of symbol group) of the first special symbol, 10R specific jackpot (design group A) "," 4R specific jackpot 1 (design group B) "," 4R specific jackpot 2 (design group C) "," 4R normal jackpot (design group D) ", the second As special jackpot type (type of symbol group), "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group F)", "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)", "4R Specific jackpot 2 (symbol group H) "," 2R normal jackpot (symbol group I) ". In the third embodiment, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, the gaming state after the end of the big hit game is (A) big hit type (type of symbol group) and (B) big hit winning It is set according to the game state of. In addition, the number of times each gaming state continues (the number of times the special symbol changes and displays) is the number of probability changes that the probability change function of the special symbol operates (the number of probability changes), and the change time that the change time shortening function of the special symbol operates. It is set based on the number of times of shortening (the number of times of time saving operation) and the number of times of the easy entry state (the number of times of electric power support operation) in which the electric Chu support function operates. The special symbol probability variation function may be continued until the next big hit occurs. Further, as the probability variation frequency, "10000 times" may be set, which substantially corresponds to the variation display frequency until the next big hit occurs.

  If you win the "10R special jackpot (symbol group A)", "4R special jackpot 1 (symbol group B)" in the first special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, after the jackpot game is over The latent probability variation game state is set as the game state. When transitioning to the latent probability variation game state after the completion of the big hit game, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time reduction number "100 times", and the easy entry state number "0 times" are set. Therefore, the latent probability change game state continues until the number of times the special symbol changes and reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times), the special When the latent probability variation game state ends by reaching the specified ST number (100 times) of the variable display number of symbols, the next special symbol variable display transitions to the normal game state, and the next big hit occurs. When the latent probability variation gaming state ends, the state shifts to the gaming state corresponding to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

  If you win the "4R specific jackpot 2 (symbol group C)" in the first special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, the probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game is over. When shifting to the probability variation game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability variation number “100 times”, the variation time reduction number “100 times”, and the easy entry state number “100 times” are set. Therefore, the probability variation game state continues until the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times), the special symbol When the probability variation game state ends by reaching the specified ST number (100 times) of the variation display count of, the variation will change from the next special symbol variation display to the normal game state, and the next big hit will cause a certainty variation. When the gaming state ends, the state shifts to the gaming state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

  When the "4R normal big hit (symbol group D)" is won in the first special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of big hit winning, the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. When shifting to the time saving game state after the big hit game is finished, the probability variation number “0”, the variation time reduction number “70”, and the easy entry state number “70” are set. Therefore, the time saving game state continues until the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specific number (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number (70 times), the variation of the special symbol. When the time saving game state ends when the number of times of display reaches a specific number (70 times), the time saving game state is changed to the normal game state from the variable display of the next special symbol, and the next big hit occurs, which causes the time saving game state. When ending, shift to the gaming state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the end of the big hit game.

  If you win the "10R specific jackpot (symbol group E)", "6R specific jackpot (symbol group F)", "4R specific jackpot 1 (symbol group G)" in the second special symbol, the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning Depending on, the game state set after the end of the big hit game is different. Specifically, if the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning is the normal gaming state, the time saving game state, or the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the jackpot game is finished, and the game at the time of jackpot winning. When the state is the time latency latent change game state, the latent probability variation game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. When transitioning to the probability variation game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time shortening number "100 times", and the easy entry state number "100 times" are set, and the latent state will be hidden after the end of the big hit game. When shifting to the probability variation gaming state, the probability variation number "100 times", the variation time reduction number "100 times", and the easy entry state number "0 times" are set. Therefore, the probability variation game state continues until the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times), the special symbol When the probability variation game state ends by reaching the specified ST number (100 times) of the variation display count of, the variation will change from the next special symbol variation display to the normal game state, and the next big hit will cause a certainty variation. When the gaming state ends, the state shifts to the gaming state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends. Similarly, the latent probability variation game state continues until the number of times the variable display of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times), the special When the latent probability variation game state ends by reaching the specified ST number (100 times) of the variable display number of symbols, the next special symbol variable display transitions to the normal game state, and the next big hit occurs. When the latent probability variation gaming state ends, the state shifts to the gaming state corresponding to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

  When the "4R special jackpot 2 (symbol group H)" is won in the second special symbol, regardless of the gaming state at the time of jackpot winning, the probability variation gaming state is set as the gaming state after the termination of the jackpot game. When shifting to the probability variation game state after the end of the big hit game, the probability variation number “100 times”, the variation time reduction number “100 times”, and the easy entry state number “100 times” are set. Therefore, the probability variation game state continues until the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specified ST number (100 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specified ST number (100 times), the special symbol When the probability variation game state ends by reaching the specified ST number (100 times) of the variation display count of, the variation will change from the next special symbol variation display to the normal game state, and the next big hit will cause a certainty variation. When the gaming state ends, the state shifts to the gaming state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the big hit game ends.

  When the "2R normal big hit (symbol group I)" is won in the second special symbol, regardless of the game state at the time of winning the big hit, the time saving game state is set as the game state after the end of the big hit game. When shifting to the time saving game state after the big hit game is finished, the probability variation number “0”, the variation time reduction number “70”, and the easy entry state number “70” are set. Therefore, the time saving game state continues until the variation display number of the special symbol reaches the specific number (70 times), or until the next big hit occurs within this specific number (70 times), the variation of the special symbol. When the time saving game state ends when the number of times of display reaches a specific number (70 times), the time saving game state is changed to the normal game state from the variable display of the next special symbol, and the next big hit occurs, which causes the time saving game state. When ending, shift to the gaming state according to the type of the big hit symbol (big hit type) after the end of the big hit game.

  Next, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a comparison table of variation times of special symbols in the third embodiment. In addition, in this 3rd Embodiment, although illustration of the variation pattern table of the special symbol is omitted, in reality, as in the first embodiment, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol is of the special symbol. It is selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern table.

  In the figure (A), the variation time of the special symbol when the game state is the normal game state is shown. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "3 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is off, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "10 minutes" when the result of the hit / miss determination is a small hit or out of bounds, and is set to "30 seconds to 90 seconds" when the result of the hit / miss determination is a big hit. ing. That is, for the variation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long variation time (10 minutes) is set as compared with other variation times, except when the result of the hit / miss determination is a big hit.

  In the figure (B), the variation time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the time saving gaming state is shown. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is off, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "10 minutes" when the result of the hit determination is out or a small hit, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. ing. That is, for the variation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long variation time (10 minutes) is set as compared with other variation times, except when the result of the hit / miss determination is a big hit.

  In the figure (C), the variation time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state is shown. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is off, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "0.5 seconds to 1 second" when the result of the hit determination is off or a small hit, and "30 seconds to 60" when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. Seconds "is set. That is, for the variation time of the second special symbol, an extremely short variation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set as compared with other variation times, except when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. .

  In the figure (D), the variable display time of the special symbol when the gaming state is the probability variation gaming state is shown. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is off, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "10 minutes" when the result of the hit determination is out or a small hit, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. ing. That is, for the variation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long variation time (10 minutes) is set as compared with other variation times, except when the result of the hit / miss determination is a big hit. In addition, as a modified example, the small gaming variation display of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, the time saving gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state, for example, "10 minutes", "11 minutes", "12 minutes", etc., variation time It is also possible to have a plurality of patterns of ultra-long fluctuations set for an extremely long time. Furthermore, regarding the variation display of the second special symbol in the normal gaming state, the time saving gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state, for example, "10 minutes", "11 minutes", "12 minutes", etc. There may be a plurality of patterns of set ultra-long fluctuations.

  Next, the normal symbol lottery in the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 55 is a schematic diagram used for explaining the normal symbol lottery in the second embodiment. In the drawing, (A) shows a normal symbol winning / discarding lottery table, (B) shows a normal symbol variation pattern table, and (C) shows a normal electric accessory release pattern table.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (A), the normal symbol hit probability is set to “160/283” when the electric Chu support function is not operating, and is “282” when the electric Chu support function is operating. / 283 ”.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (B), the variation time of the normal symbol is set to “20 seconds” when the electric Chu support function is not operating, and is “1 second when the electric Chu support function is operating. Is set to.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (C), the opening pattern of the ordinary electric accessory 522 is set to “open for 0.1 second” when the electric Chu support function is not activated, and the electric Chu support function is activated. If it is, it is set to “open for 4 seconds”.

  In the third embodiment having such a configuration, when the game state is the normal game state (low probability / low base state), the game ball is first left-up (the game ball is shot by aiming at the left side area PA1). By entering the ball into the starting opening 51A, it becomes a game that mainly executes the judgment of whether or not the first special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol) is executed. When the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the gaming ball can be inserted into the second starting opening 52 by right-handing (shooting the gaming ball aiming at the right area PA1), but the second special Since the variation time of the symbol is set to an extremely long time (because it takes a long time until the variation display of the second special symbol is finished), the variation efficiency is remarkably inferior, and a right-handed game is performed. It is better to enter the game ball into the upper first starting opening 51A by left-handing than to enter the ball into the second starting opening 52.

  Further, when the game state shifts to a time saving game state (low probability high base state) or a probability variation game state (high probability / high base state), the electric Chu support function operates, and the lower first starting opening 51B (normal electric Since the ease with which the game ball enters the accessory 512) is increased, the game ball is moved to the upper first start opening 51A or the lower first start opening 52 by left-handing (shooting the game ball aiming at the right area PA1). Enter the ball, and the game will be carried out mainly to determine whether or not to win the first special symbol (variable display of the first special symbol). In addition, when the game state is a time saving game state (low probability high base state) or a probability variation game state (high probability / high base state), a game ball is shot by right-handing (shooting a game ball aiming at the right side area PA1). It is also possible to enter the ball into the second starting opening 52, but because the variation time of the second special symbol is set to an extremely long time (the time required until the variation display of the second special symbol is finished becomes long. Therefore, a game with a significantly low fluctuation efficiency is to be played, and the game ball is hit to the left with the upper first start opening 51A or the lower first start opening than to enter the game ball into the second start opening 52 with the right hit. It is better to enter the ball at 51B.

  On the other hand, when the game state shifts to the latent probability change game state (high probability low base state), the characteristic game that the small hit game frequently occurs when the game ball enters the second starting opening 52 (small hit) RUSH) is performed, it is better to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 52 by right-handing, rather than entering the game ball into the upper first starting opening 51A by left-handing, and as a result, It becomes a game property that mainly executes the determination of whether the second special symbol is valid or not (variable display of the second special symbol).

  Here, when the game state is the latent probability variation game state, similarly to the above-described first embodiment, the game ball is inserted into the second starting opening 52 to perform the variable display of the second special symbol with high frequency, Until the next big hit occurs, the small hit game will be executed frequently. As a result, each time a small hit game is executed, about 2 to 3 game balls are inserted into the special winning opening 54, and about 20 to 30 prize balls are consecutively obtained each time, so that the ball is held. Can be increased.

  Incidentally, in the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 53, when the result of the determination result of the second special symbol is a big hit, only when the gaming state at the time of winning the big hit is the latent probability variation gaming state, the big hit The game state after the end of the game shifts to the latent probability variation game state (small hit RUSH mode). As the reason, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the time saving gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game, so the result of the hit determination of the second special symbol is a big hit ( This is to suppress a shift to the latent certainty variation game state (small hit RUSH mode), which is the most advantageous state for the player when a so-called accident hit occurs, and to ensure a fair and fair game. Also, in the normal gaming state, when a special big hit of the second special symbol occurs, by shifting to the probability variation gaming state instead of the latent probability variation gaming state, right-handing in the normal gaming state (there is also a possibility to enter in the normal gaming state or By hitting the right at the second starting opening 52 that is easy to enter the ball) by obtaining a specific jackpot of the second special symbol, a fraudulent act such as forcibly plunging from the normal gaming state to the latent probability variation gaming state (small hitting RUSH mode) Can be prevented.

  As described above, in the third embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the time saving gaming state, and the probability variation gaming state, the left side area PA1 is the main subject area of the game, and the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state. , The right area PA2 becomes the main area of the game. In addition, also in the third embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, regarding the preliminary determination for the special symbol operation holding ball, only the special symbol operation holding ball of the person who becomes the main subject of the game in each game state is pre-determined. It may be a target of the determination. That is, in the normal game state, the time saving game state, in the probability variation game state, only the operation reserved ball of the first special symbol is the target of the pre-determination, and in the latent probability variation game state, only the operation reserved ball of the second special symbol is pre-determined. It is preferable to target. Further, in the third embodiment, as for the variation time reduction function of the special symbol, of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, at least the variation time of the special symbol which is the main subject of the game in the game state is reduced. It should have been done. That is, in the third embodiment, it can be said that the variation time shortening function of the special symbol is operating, the gaming state in which the variation display of the first special symbol is the main subject of the game (normal gaming state, time saving gaming state, probability change). In the gaming state), the variation time of the first special symbol is shortened, and the variation state of the second special symbol is shortened in the gaming state where the variation display of the second special symbol is the main subject of the game (latent probability variation gaming state). Good.

  Next, the symbol determination signal in the third embodiment will be described. In the third embodiment as well, as in the first embodiment, if the variable display of the first special symbol is the gaming state that is the main subject of the game, it is triggered that the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped. As the symbol confirmation signal is output on, and if the variable display of the second special symbol is a game state that serves as a means of game, the symbol confirmation signal is output on when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. It

  Specifically, the probability change function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol simultaneously start operation in the state where the electric Chu support function is inactive, and then the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol Is stopped 100 times in total (specified ST number) and the fixed display time (stop display time) elapses, when the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, the variable display of the first special symbol The symbol finalization signal is not output on the occasion that is stopped. In other words, when the gaming state is the latent probability variation gaming state, the variable display of the second special symbol becomes the main subject of the game, and the variable display of the first special symbol is stopped, and the symbol determination signal is output on. It will not be done.

  On the other hand, the probability change function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are simultaneously activated in the state where the electric Chu support function is not activated, and the variation display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is 100 in total. Except until the fixed display time (stopped display time) elapses after stopping the number of times (specified ST times), when the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped, the variable display of the second special symbol is stopped. The symbol confirmation signal is not output ON as a trigger. In other words, when the gaming state is the normal gaming state, the time saving gaming state or the probability variation gaming state, the variable display of the first special symbol becomes the main body of the game, so that the variable display of the second special symbol has stopped , The symbol confirmation signal is not output on.

[Fourth Embodiment]
Next, a pachinko game machine according to the fourth embodiment will be described. The pachinko gaming machine of the fourth embodiment basically has the same configuration as the pachinko gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, parts having the same configurations are designated by the same reference numerals. The description will be omitted, and different points will be mainly described. That is, in the following description, a configuration common to that of the fourth embodiment can be applied, except for special cases.

  FIG. 56 is a front view of the pachinko game machine of the fourth embodiment. On the front surface of the game board 20, an outer rail 41 and an inner rail 42 are fixed in an arc shape, and a substantially circular game area PA on which a game ball can roll is defined. A center ornament 21 is provided in the approximate center of the game area PA, and the screen of the effect display device 70 is provided so as to be visible through the center opening of the center ornament 21. In addition, the game area PA is based on the center decoration 21 in the substantially center, a left area PA1 which is an area on the left side of the center decoration 21 (a board surface area corresponding to left-handing), and an area on the right side of the center decoration 21 (right-handing). And a right side area PA2 which is a board surface area corresponding to. At the upper part of the center ornament 21, an introduction passage 44 connecting the left side area PA1 and the right side area PA2 is provided, so that the game ball hit to the right can pass through the introduction passage 44 and reach the right side area PA2. ing.

  A first starting port 51 is arranged in a region below the center ornament 21. The first starting opening 51 is provided as a starting winning opening corresponding to the first special symbol game, and is provided with a first starting opening switch 511 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The first starting opening 51A is a normally open type winning opening that is opened upward, and mainly allows a game ball (left-handed game ball) flowing down the left side area PA1 to enter. The entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 51 is a trigger for the first special symbol lottery.

  The second starting port 52 is arranged in the area on the right side of the center ornament 21 (right side area PA2), and the special winning opening 54 is arranged diagonally below and to the left. ing. The second starting port 52 is provided as a starting winning port corresponding to the second special symbol game, and is provided with a second starting port switch 521 for detecting the entry of a game ball. The second starting opening 52 is a normally open type winning opening that is opened upward, and mainly allows a game ball (right-handed game ball) flowing down the right side area PA2 to enter. The entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 52 is a trigger for the second special symbol lottery.

  The special winning opening 54 is formed as a horizontal rectangular winning opening that is opened when the winning / winning lottery result of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit or a small hit. The special winning opening 54 is a special winning opening switch 541 for detecting the entry of a game ball, a special electric accessory 542 generally called an attacker, and a big winning for opening and closing the special electric accessory 542. And a mouth solenoid 543. The special electric accessory 542 is changed into an open state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter the special winning opening 54. In the special game (big hit game, small hit game), when the game ball is shot, by hitting the right side area PA2, that is, by so-called right hitting, it becomes easy to enter the special winning opening 54. There is.

  In the fourth embodiment, the game ball flowing down the left side area PA1 can mainly enter the first starting opening 51. On the other hand, the game ball flowing down the right side area PA2 can mainly enter the second starting opening 52 or the special winning opening 54. In addition, in the fourth embodiment, the first starting port 51 and the second starting port 52 are configured as non-variable starting ports (normally opening type starting ports). Not not.

  Next, the jackpot type (breakdown breakdown) in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 57 is a schematic diagram showing a special symbol big hit symbol table as a big hit breakdown in the fourth embodiment.

  FIG. 57 (A) is a diagram schematically showing the first special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this first special symbol big hit symbol table, for the symbol random number value per special symbol, the symbol group, the big hit type, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 of each round They are associated with each other (in this example, description of stop symbols is omitted for convenience). In the first special symbol jackpot table, three jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is sorted into 10R specific big hit (symbol group A), 4R specific big hit (symbol group B), and 4R normal big hit (symbol group C). In the 10R specific big hit (symbol group A), the number of specified rounds of the big hit game is 10, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. 4R specific big hit (symbol group B) and 4R normal big hit (symbol group C), the specified round number of big hit game is 4 rounds, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game 28 seconds.

  FIG. 57 (B) is a diagram schematically showing a second special symbol jackpot symbol table. In this second special symbol big hit symbol table, for the symbol random number value per special symbol, the symbol group, the big hit type, the specified number of rounds of the big hit game, the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 of each round They are associated with each other (in this example, description of stop symbols is omitted for convenience). In the second special symbol jackpot table, two jackpot types are set according to each symbol group. Specifically, it is divided into 10R specific big hit (symbol group D) and 4R normal big hit (symbol group E). In the 10R specific big hit (symbol group D), the number of specified rounds of the big hit game is 10, and the opening time (maximum opening time) of the special winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds. 4R normal big hit (symbol group E), the prescribed number of rounds of big hit game is four, the open time (maximum open time) of the big winning opening 54 in one round game is 28 seconds.

  Next, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol in the fourth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a comparison table of variation times of special symbols in the fourth embodiment. In addition, in this 4th Embodiment, although illustration of the variation pattern table of the special symbol is omitted, in reality, like the first embodiment, the variation time (variation pattern) of the special symbol is the special symbol. It is selected by referring to the fluctuation pattern table.

  In the figure (A), the variation time of the special symbol when the game state is the first game state (low probability state) is shown. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "3 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / miss determination is out of order, and is set to "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit / miss determination is a big hit. ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "10 minutes" when the result of the hit determination is a small hit or out, and is set to "30 to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. ing. That is, for the variation time of the second special symbol, an extremely long variation time (10 minutes) is set as compared with other variation times, except when the result of the hit / miss determination is a big hit.

  In the figure (B), the variation time of the special symbol when the game state is the second game state (high probability state) is shown. The variation time of the first special symbol is set to "1 second to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is off, and "30 seconds to 60 seconds" when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. ing. The variation time of the second special symbol is set to "0.5 seconds to 1 second" when the result of the hit determination is off or a small hit, and "30 seconds to 60" when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. Seconds "is set. That is, for the variation time of the second special symbol, an extremely short variation time (0.5 seconds to 1 second) is set as compared with other variation times, except when the result of the hit determination is a big hit. . As a modification thereof, for the small hit variation display of the second special symbol in the first gaming state, for example, "10 minutes", "11 minutes", "12 minutes", etc. A plurality of patterns of the super-long fluctuations may be provided. Furthermore, regarding the variation display of the second special symbol in the first gaming state, for example, "10 minutes", "11 minutes", "12 minutes", etc. It may have a plurality of patterns.

  In the fourth embodiment, as a plurality of types of gaming states, the first gaming state in which the jackpot probability is set to a relatively low probability (about 1/329) and the jackpot probability are relatively high probability (about 1/3) The second game state set in 80) is set. The first gaming state is a gaming state that is set after the jackpot game is over, when the "4R normal jackpot" is won as the jackpot type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. In addition, the second game state is set after the jackpot game is ended by the fact that the “10R specified jackpot” or “4R specified jackpot” is won as the jackpot type of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. It is in a state.

  When the game state is the first game state (low probability state), the game ball is inserted into the first starting opening 51 by left-handing (shooting the game ball aiming at the left side area PA1), and the first special It becomes the game nature which mainly executes the judgment of whether or not the symbol is correct (variable display of the first special symbol). When the gaming state is the first gaming state, the gaming ball can be inserted into the second starting opening 52 by right-handing (shooting the gaming ball aiming at the right side area PA1), but the second special Since the variation time of the symbol is set to an extremely long time (because it takes a long time until the variation display of the second special symbol is finished), the variation efficiency is remarkably inferior, and a right-handed game is performed. It is better to enter the game ball into the first starting opening 51 by left-handing than to enter the ball into the second starting opening 52.

  On the other hand, when the gaming state is the second gaming state (high probability state), a characteristic game (small hitting RUSH) that a small hitting game frequently occurs when the game ball enters the second starting opening 52 is used as a trigger. By being performed, it is better to enter the game ball into the second starting opening 52 by right-handing, rather than entering the game ball into the first starting opening 51 by left-handing, and as a result, the second special symbol. It becomes the game nature which mainly executes the hit determination (variable display of the second special symbol). Therefore, also in the fourth embodiment, when the game state is the second game state, the game ball enters the second starting opening 52 as a trigger, as in the above-described first to third embodiments. The small hit RUSH mode in which small hit games frequently occur is executed.

[Common modification]
Next, a common modification of the first to fourth embodiments will be described. The gaming machine according to this common modification basically has the same configuration as that of any one of the above-described first to fourth embodiments, and the same configuration will be described below. The portions having the same reference numerals are given and the description thereof is omitted, and different portions will be mainly described.

<Common modification 1>
In the above-mentioned embodiment, when the result of the hit determination of the special symbol is a big hit, the normal probability variation gaming machine that determines the presence or absence of the probability variation transition based on the stop symbol of the special symbol (big hit symbol) is adopted, but in this configuration Without being limited to this, if the result of the special symbol hit determination is a big hit, it is determined whether or not there is a probability change transition depending on whether or not the game ball enters the specific area during the execution of the big hit game. A probability variation gaming machine may be adopted. Further, as a modified example of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, a certain variation game state that is given as an opportunity to be a big hit with the first special symbol or the second special symbol with the limit number (upper limit number) set in advance as a limit. Alternatively, a gaming machine having a limiter function for limiting the number of continuous latent probability variation game states may be adopted. Further, in the above embodiment, the probability variation function of the special symbol exemplifies the number-of-times-cut probability variation machine that continuously operates for the specified number of STs (for example, 100 times), but the probability variation function of the special symbol is after the jackpot game is over. It may be configured as a normal probability variation machine that continues until the next big hit occurs.

<Common modification 2>
In the above-described embodiment, the model in which only one big winning hole is mounted in the game area has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a model in which a plurality of big winning holes are mounted in the game area is applied. May be. In addition, when adopting a model equipped with a plurality of special winning openings, as the above V probability variation gaming machine, a specific area (probability variation function operation area, V area) that serves as an activation trigger for the probability variation function of the special symbol is provided. It is possible to mount two or more special winning openings, a first special winning opening and a second special winning opening that does not have this specific area (probability variation function operating area, V area). As an example of the board layout, the first special winning opening and the second special winning opening may be arranged side by side substantially vertically or substantially right or left in the right side area of the game area, or the first big winning opening is arranged. The board area to be played may be different from the board area in which the second special winning opening is arranged. In that case, the number of prize balls (unit number of prize balls) to be paid out when the game balls enter the first special winning opening and the payout when the game balls enter the second special winning opening The number of prize balls (number of unit prize balls) to be displayed may be the same or different. Also, of the two big winning openings, the first big winning opening (or second big winning opening) is for big hits, and the second big winning opening (or first big winning opening) is for big hits. It may be configured as a special winning opening. In that case, the number of award balls (number of unit award balls) of the big winning award for the small hit game may be 10, the number of award balls of the large prize opening for a large hit game (the number of unit award balls) may be 15, etc. Good.

<Common modification 3>
In the above-described embodiment, among a plurality of types of gaming states, the latent probability variation gaming state is defined as the gaming state in which the probability varying function of the special symbol and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol are activated, and the electric Chu support function is not activated. However, it is not limited to this, the latent probability variation gaming state is defined as a gaming state in which only the probability variation function of the special symbol is activated, and the variation time shortening function of the special symbol and the electric Chu support function are not activated. May be. Further, the variable time shortening function of the special symbol is divided into a variable time shortening function of the first special symbol and a variable time shortening function of the second special symbol, and the probability probability variation function of the special symbol for the latent probability variation gaming state and the second The variation time shortening function of the 2 special symbols is activated, and it may be defined as a gaming state in which the electric-chu support function is not activated. In addition, the electric Chu support function, even if it operates in synchronization with the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time reduction function), the special symbol variation time reduction function (second special symbol variation time) (Shortening function) may be operated independently.

  Next, in order to make it easier to understand the technical significance of the above-described embodiments (first to fourth embodiments) and the modifications, the problems corresponding to the above-mentioned embodiments and the modifications will be outlined.

  In the conventional model Pachinko game machine, it is known that if the result of the above-mentioned hit determination corresponds to a small hit, it executes a small hit game in which the earned profit is set relatively lower than the big hit game (for example, (See JP 2012-152370 A).

  In the conventional model Pachinko gaming machine, it is equipped with various game states such as a normal game state in which the winning probability of win / loss determination is set to the normal probability, and an advantageous game state in which the winning probability of win / loss determination is higher than the normal probability, It is known that the number of times of variable display of symbols reaches a predetermined number in the advantageous game state, and then shifts to the normal game state (for example, see JP-A-2011-182873).

  In the conventional model Pachinko gaming machine, for example, the probability variation game state in which the winning probability of the win / loss determination is increased, and various time-saving game states in which the efficiency of the symbol variation for suggesting or informing the result of the win / loss determination is increased. It is known that the game state is provided and the remaining number of symbol variations until the game state is finished is known (for example, refer to "Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2003-210759").

  In the conventional model Pachinko gaming machine, if the result of the hit determination is a big hit, depending on the type of big hit symbol stopped and displayed at the end of the variation display, the game state after the end of the special game may differ. It is known (see, for example, “JP 2011-120804 A”).

  It is known that a pachinko game machine of a conventional model outputs game information regarding the operating status of the game machine as an external information signal to an external device arranged outside the game machine (for example, " 2006-325753 ”Patent Document 1).

  In the conventional model Pachinko gaming machine, various gaming states such as probability variation game state in which the winning probability of win / loss determination is increased, and time saving game state in which the efficiency of symbol variation for suggesting or informing the result of win / loss determination is increased. And a variation effect according to the type of the game state is developed (see, for example, “JP 2011-115441 A”).

  However, since there are already many pachinko machines that employ such a configuration as conventional models, it is required to further enhance the excitement of the game in order to differentiate it from the conventional models. .

  Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine according to the above-described embodiment and modification, the above-mentioned configuration is adopted to achieve the above-mentioned operational effects for the purpose of improving the fun of the game.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modifications, and can be appropriately modified within the scope of the gist of the present invention. In addition, a combination of the constituent elements described in the above-described embodiments and modifications is appropriately combined, or a part of the constituent elements described in the above-described embodiments and modifications is deleted or converted by a well-known / common technique or the like. These are also included in the scope of the present invention.

PM Pachinko game machine PA Game area PA1 Left side area PA2 Right side area 1 Outer frame 2 Front frame 5 Glass frame 20 Game board 51 1st starting opening 52 2nd starting opening 53 Working gate 54 Big winning opening 70 Performance display device 71 1st special Symbol display device 72 2nd special symbol display device 91 1st role continuous operation gate 92 2nd role continuous operation gate 100 Main control board 200 Production control board 300 Image control board 400 Discharge control board 500 Power supply board 600 External information terminal board 511 1 start opening switch 521 2nd starting opening switch 531 actuation gate switch 541 special winning opening switch 911 1st winning combination operating gate switch 921 2nd winning combination operating gate switch

Claims (1)

A game board with a game area formed,
A first starting opening provided at a predetermined position in the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
A second start opening provided at a position different from the first start opening of the game area, into which a game ball can enter,
A first winning / judgment determining means for executing a winning / judgment determination triggered by a game ball entering the first starting opening;
Second winning / unwinning determination means for performing winning / unwinning determination triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening,
Special game execution means for executing a special game that is advantageous to the player when the result of the hit determination by the first hit determination means or the result of the hit determination by the second hit determination means is a big hit,
A first symbol display device in which the first symbol showing the result of the determination by the first determination unit is variably displayed and stopped.
A second symbol display device in which a second symbol indicating the result of the determination by the second determination unit is displayed in a variable and stopped manner.
In the first symbol display device, a first symbol display control means for displaying the first symbol in a variable display and a stop display,
Second symbol display control means for displaying the second symbol in a variable display and a stop display in the second symbol display device,
An effect display device that displays an effect that suggests the result of the hit determination by the first hit determination means or the result of the hit determination performed by the second hit determination means;
And an effect determining unit that determines effect contents to be displayed on the effect display device,
As a plurality of types of gaming states, at least a normal gaming state and an advantageous gaming state having a higher degree of advantage than the normal gaming state,
When the gaming state is the advantageous gaming state, the total number of variable display times of the first symbol and the second symbol is counted from immediately after being set to the advantageous game state, and the total number of times of variation display reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times. , The game state can be set from the advantageous game state to the normal game state,
When the gaming state is the advantageous gaming state, it is possible to inform the information regarding the remaining number of times of the advantageous gaming state over a plurality of variable displays,
When the gaming state is an advantageous gaming state, it is configured not to notify the information about the remaining number until the remaining number reaches a predetermined number less than the upper limit number,
As a production mode in the normal game state, at least a first production mode,
At least a second effect mode is provided as an effect mode in the advantageous game state,
As the upper limit number of times to stay in the first effect mode, the first upper limit number is set,
As the upper limit number of times to stay in the second effect mode, the second upper limit number is set,
When staying in the first effect mode, as the variable display number until reaching the first upper limit number, while only targeting the variable display number of the first symbol performed during the first effect mode,
When staying in the second effect mode, the total number of variable display times of the first symbol and the second symbol performed during the second effect mode is targeted as the variable display number until the second upper limit number is reached. Pachinko game machine characterized by the following.

Images